TA 
2100 


UC-NRLF 


A  Hand-Book, 


of 


Latin  Notes. 


Compiled  and  Arranged  by 

W.  BOSWORTH, 

McGUIRE^S  SCHOOL, 

RICHMOND,  VA. 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

IN  MEMORY  OF 

PROFESSOR  WILLIAM  MERRILL 

AND 
MRS.  IMOGENE  MERRILL 


(O  .  '7r  . 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES, 

BASED  FOR  THE  MOST  PART  UPON 

THE  SYNTAX  OF  THE  LATIN  VERB  AND  CASE 
RELATIONS  OF  PROFESSOR  PETERS, 

(UNIVERSITY  OF  VIRGINIA.) 


GILDERSLEEVE'S  LATIN  GRAMMAR. 


COMPILED  AND  ARRANGED  BY 

E.  W.  BOSWORTH, 

McGUIRE'S  SCHOOL,  RICHMOND,  VIRGINIA. 


RICHMOND,  VA. : 

WHITTET  &  SHEPPERSON,  GENERAL  PRINTERS. 
1899. 


GIFT 


Entered,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1899,  by 

E.  W.  BOSWORTH, 
in  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  at  Washignton. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 


Rule  of  Accent. 

The  last  syllable  of  a  word  can  on  no  account  receive  the 
accent,  except  in  poetry. 

In  a  word  of  two  syllables  the  accent  must  be  on  the  first. 

In  a  word  of  more  than  two  syllables  the  accent  falls  on  the 
penult  if  it  is  long.  If  the  penult  is  short,  the  accent  falls  on  the 
antepenult.  If  the  penult  is  common,  i.  e.f  long  or  short,  the 
accent  may  fall  on  the  penult  or  antepenult. 

When 'one  of  the  enclitics  -que,  -ve,  or  -ne  is  added,  put  an 
accent  on  the  preceding  syllable. 

Rule  for  Syllables. 

1.  A  consonant  between  two  vowels  belongs  to  the  second. 

2.  Two  or  three  consonants  that  may  begin  a  word  (i.  e.,  be 
pronounced  together)  go  with  the  following  vowel.    Ex. — li-bri, 
no-ster,  a-per. 

Kern. — This  rule  is  frequently  violated. 

3.  A  double  consonant,  or  consonants  that  could  not  together 
begin  a  word  are  divided,  as  ar-tis,  col-lis,  am-plius. 

4.  The  elements  of  compounds  are  treated  as  separate  words, 
as  db-rumpo,  res-publica. 


THE  ACCUSATIVE. 
1,   The  Accusative  of  the  Terminus,  or  point  to  which, 

1.  In  space,  with  a  preposition,  generally  ad  or  in. 

Ex. — In  Grasciam.    In  montem.    In  flumen.    Ad  portas.    Ad 


oram. 


2.  In  time,  with  a  preposition. 

Ex. — Ad  secundam  horam.     Ad  solis  occasum.     Ad  senec- 
tutem. 


MGS6697 


4  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

3.  In  abstract  relations,  with  a  preposition. 

Ex. — In  furorem  incidere :  to  fall  into  a  rage.  In  servitutem 
redigere :  to  reduce  to  servitude.  In  potestatem  venire :  to  come 
into  power.  In  f ugam  dare :  to  put  to  flight. 

NOTE. — The  preposition  may  be  in  composition  with  the  verb 
and  it  may  also  be  repeated. 

But  names  of  towns,  cities  and  small  islands,  used  to  show 
place  whither,  are  put  in  the  Accusative  without  a  preposition. 
Likewise  observe  domum,  domos  (home),  and  rus  (into  the  coun- 

try). 

Note  also  the  forms  eo  (thither,  to  that  place),  quo  (whither), 
alio  (to  another  place),  aliquo  (to  some,  any  place). 

Ex. — Legati  Romam  venerunt :  the  ambassadors  came  to 
Rome.  Athenas  rediit :  he  has  returned  to  Athens.  Tarentum 
.proficiscitur :  he  is  starting  (setting  out)  for  Tarentum. 

Rem.  1,  a.  The  possessives  meam,  suam,  nostram,  etc.,  may 
modify  domum,  in  which  case  no  preposition  should  be  used. 

Ex. — Meam,  tuam,  nostram,  etc.,  domum :  to  my,  your,  our, 
etc.,  home. 

1).  With  a  Genitive  of  the  possessor,  or  an  adjective  of  like 
force,  the  preposition  may  be  used  or  omitted. 

Ex. — Domum  Lucii,  or  in  domum  Lucii :  to  the  house  (home) 
of  Lucius.  Domum  Pompeitwn,  or  in  domum  Pomper&m :  to  the 
house  of  Pompey. 

c.  With  any  other  adjective  or  Genitive  the  preposition  should 
be  used. 

Ex. — In  hanc,  aliam,  gratam,  domum :  to  this,  another,  pleas- 
ant, home. 

Rem.  2,  a.  When  the  name  of  a  city,  etc.,  in  the  Accusative  of 
the  Terminus  or  End  is  associated  with  an  appositive  urbem,  op- 
pidum,  insulam,  etc.,  the  preposition  is  used  and  precedes  both. 

Ex. — Ad  urbem  Ilerdam:  to  the  city  of  Ilerda.  Ad  urbem 
Syracusas :  to  the  city  of  Syracuse. 

b.  When  the  appositive  urbem,  etc.,  is  defined  by  an  adjective 
or  Genitive,  the  preposition  may  be  used,  in  which  case  the  name 
of  the  city,  etc.,  best  precedes  it.  If  the  preposition  is  omitted, 
the  name  of  the  city,  etc.,  must  precede  the  appositive  word. 

Ex. — Thalam  pervenit  in  oppidum  magnum  atque  opulentum : 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  5 

he  arrived  at  Thala,  a  large  and  wealthy  town ;  or  the  large  and 
wealthy  town  of  Thala.  Demaratus  se  contulit  Tarquinios  in 
urbem  Etrurise  florentissimam :  Demaratus  betook  himself  to 
Tarquinii,  a  most  flourishing  city  of  Etrurian  Veios  ad  hostium 
urbem  fugerunt :  they  fled  to  Veil,  a  city  of  the  enemy.  Inde 
profectus  Gergoviam  Boiorum  oppidum :  from  that  place  he  set 
out  for  Gergovia,  a  town  of  the  Boii. 

c.  If  the  name  of  the  town,  etc.,  has  an  attributive,  the  prepo- 
sition may  be  used  or  omitted. 

Ex. — Doctas  Athenas,  or  ad  doctas  Athenas :  to  learned 
Athens. 

Rem.  3.    A  preposition  is  used  with  names  of  towns,  etc.,  when 
mere  direction  or  extent  is  implied. 

Ex. — A  Salonis  ad  Oricum  portus :  the  harbors  from  Salonae 
to  Oricus. 

Eem.  4.  Ad  is  often  used  with  the  name  of  a  town  to  mean 
in  (to)  the  vicinity  of,  near,  before.  (See  14.) 

Ex. — Caesar  ad  Genavam  pervenit:  Caesar  arrived  before 
Geneva. 

2.  The  place  to  which  embraces  all  local  designations  in  con- 
nection with  it. 

Ex. — In  hiberna  in  Sequanos  exercitum  deduxit:  he  led  his 
army  into  winter-quarters  in  the  country  of  the  Sequani. 

Caelius  ad  Caesarem  pervenit  Thurios :  Caelius  came  to  Caesar 
at  Thurii. 

Tarentum  in  Italiam  inf eriorem  proficisci :  to  set  out  for  Ta- 
rentum  in  Lower  Italy. 

8.  "By,"  "against/"  "for,"  "until"  a  certain  time  are  ex- 
pressed by  ad  or  in  with  the  Accusative. 

Ex. — Dixit  se  Roma?  fore  ad  meum  adventum :  he  said  that  he 
would  be  at  Rome  by  my  arrival. 

Ad  pr.  Nonas  Maias :  by  the  6th  of  May. 

In  aluid  tempus  reservare :  to  keep  for  another  time. 

In  tertium  diem  differre :  to  put  off  until  the  third  day. 

4.  The  Accusative  is  used  with  ad  and  in  in  a  final  sense,  to 
express  the  object  or  purpose  for  which,  or  the  end  in  view. 


6  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Ex. — Sic  ad  siipplicium  ISTumitori  Remus  deditur:  thus  Re- 
mus was  given  up  to  Numitor  for  punishment. 

Ad  rem  se  offerre :  to  offer  one's  self  for  a  thing. 

Ad  suam  utilitatem  hoc  fecit :  he  has  done  this  with  a  view  to 
his  own  advantage. 

N~ec  Agricola  unquam  in  suam  f amam  gestis  exsultavit :  nor 
did  Agricola  ever  boast  of  his  achievements  for  (with  an  eye  to) 
his  own  renown. 

The  Adverbial  Accusative. 

5.  The  Accusative  is  often  used  in  an  adverbial  sense  showing 
the  extent  to  which  a  statement  is  true. 

Ex. — Meam  partern:  for  my  part.  Magnam  partem:  in  a 
great  measure. 

Maximam  partem  lacte  atque  pecore  vivunt :  they  live  for  the 
most  part  on  milk  and  flesh  of  cattle. 

Meam  (tuam,  suam,  nostram,  vestram)  vicem :  in  my,  etc., 
place  or  turn.  Nihil :  in  no  wise,  not  at  all.  Aliquantum :  some- 
what. Multum,  paulum,  etc. 

Compare  the  phrases  ex  parte  (in  part),  aliqua  ex  parte  (in 
some  degree,  to  some  extent),  magna  ex  parte  (in  a  great 
measure). 

Rem. — Sometimes  aliqua  parte.,  magna  parte,  etc.,  occur  in 
same  sense. 

Note  also,  multis  partibus:  in  many  respects.  Omnibus  par- 
tibus :  in  all  respects. 

(i  The  Greek  Accusative,  or  Accusative  of  Specification,  is 
used  of  the  part  affected  or  specified,  with  an  intransitive  verb,  a 
passive  verb,  a  participle,  or  an  adjective. 

Ex. — Artus  tremit :   he  trembles  in  his  joints. 

Hannibal  ipse  adversum  femur  tragula  graviter  ictus  cecidit : 
Hannibal  himself  fell  seriously  wounded  by  a  dart  in  the  front 
part  of  his  thigh. 

Nube  candentes  umeros  amictus,  augur  Apollo :  Apollo,  the 
augur,  with  thy  shining  shoulders  enveloped  in  a  cloud. 

luvenis  manus  post  terga  revinctus :  a  young  man  with  his 
hands  bound  behind  his  back. 

This  construction  is  chiefly  poetical,  and  should  be  avoided. 


HAXD-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  7 

Use  instead  the  Ablative  or  some  other  turn  of  expression.  (See 
24.) 

The  Accusative  of  Extent. 

7.  I.  In  space  with  a  preposition. 

Ex. — Per  totum  mare:  over  the  whole  sea.  Per  Alpes: 
through  the  Alps.  Per  fines  Allobrogum :  through  the  territory 
of  the  Allobroges.  Trans  fiumen :  across  the  river.  Secundum 
mare :  along  the  sea.  Prater  oram :  along  the  shore.  Circum 
terram:  around  the  earth. 

2.  In  time  with  or  without  a  preposition. 

Ex. — Multos  (per)  annos :  many  years,  for  many  years,  during 
many  years.  (Per)  magnam  partem  anni:  during  a  great  part 
of  the  year.  Per  totam  noctem :  throughout,  during  the  whole 
night  (cf.  tota  nocte). 

3.  In  abstract  relations,  with  the  preposition  per. 

Ex. — Per  pericula :  through  dangers.  Per  tot  discrimina 
rerum :  through  so  many  hazards.  Per  varies  casus :  through 
various  accidents  (chances). 

NOTE. — The  preposition  is  usually  per,  but  trans,  circum, 
secundum,  praeter,  intra,  inter,  etc.,  occur  in  proper  sense. 

8.  Measure  of  distance  with  abesse,  distare,  esse,  and  other 
verbs,  must  be  expressed  by  the  Accusative  alone,  or  by  the  Ab- 
lative alone,  i.  e.,  without  a  preposition. 

Ex. — Milia  (milibus)  passuum  tria  (tribus)  ab  eorum  castris 
castra  posuit:  he  pitched  camp  three  miles  from  their  camp. 
Milibus  (milia)  passuum  sex  a  Caesaris  castris  sub  monte  con- 
sedit :  he  encamped  at  the  foot  of  the  mountain  six  miles  from 
Caesar's  camp. 

a.  The  Ablative  is  the  necessary  construction  when  the  point 
from  which  distance  is  reckoned  is  not  expressed.     In  this  case 
a  (ab)  is  used,  translated  "off"  or  "away,"  its  object  being  under- 
stood. 

Ex. — Aciem  a  milibus  passuum  circiter  duobus  instruxit :  he 
drew  up  his  line  of  battle  about  two  miles  off. 

b.  S patio  and  intervatto  (at  the  distance  of)  with  the  Genitive 
are  also  common. 

Ex. — Quod    oppidum    a    Corfiinio    VII.    milium    intervallo 


8  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

(spatio)   abest:    a  town  which  is  at  a  distance  of  seven  miles 
(seven  miles  distant)  from  Corfmium. 

9  In  comparative  expressions   of   magnitude,   number   and 
quantity,  amplius,  plus  and  minus — with  or  without  quam — and 
longius  (with  which  no  examples  using  quam  are  given)  are  used 
without  altering  the  construction. 

Ex. — Abest  directo  itinere  ab  Utica  paulo  amplius  (longius) 
passus  mille  (=amplius  quam  passus  mille,  or  amplius  (longius) 
passibus  mille)  :  It  is  a  little  more  than  a  mile  from  Utica  by  a 
direct  road.  Nee  plus  quam  quattuor  milia  (=Nec  plus  quattuor 
milia,  or  nee  plus  quattuor  milibus)  hominum  effugerunt:  and 
not  more  than  four  thousand  men  escaped. 

a.  There  were  various  ways  of  expressing  "older'7  or  "younger 
than"— 

(1)  ISTatus  plus  or  amplius,  minus  (quam)  decem  annos. 

(2)  Natus  plus  or  amplius,  minus  decem  annis. 

(3)  Maior,  minor  (quam)  decem  annos  natus. 

(4)  Maior,  minor  decem  annis  (natus). 

(5)  maior,  minor  decem  annis  (natu). 

(6)  Maior,  minor  decem  annorum. 

10  In  is  used  of  a  period  of  time  to  come,  ahead,  to  be  passed 
over.    Compare  the  German  auf. 

Ex. — Indutia?  Carthaginiensibus  dataa  in  tres  menses  sunt :  a 
truce  was  granted  to  the  Carthaginians  for  three  months. 

Frumentum  in  hiemem  provisum  non  erat :  grain  had  not 
been  provided  for  the  winter. 

In  praBsens  (tempus)  :  for  the  present.  In  perpetuum  (seter- 
num)  :  for  ever.  In  futurum  (posterum,  posteritatem)  :  in,  or 
for,  the  future. 

Sex  in  eum  annum  decretse  legiones  (sunt)  :  six  legions  were 
voted  for  that  year. 

11.  Dimension  (length,  breadth,  height,  depth)  is  expressed 
by  longus,  latus,  or  altus,  with  the  Accusative. 

Ex. — Murus  quindecim  pedes  altus :  a  wall  fifteen  feet  high. 

It  may  also  be  expressed  by  in  longitudinem,  in  latitudinem,  in 
altitudinem  with  the  Genitive  (sometimes  the  Accusative  in  ap- 
position) . 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  9 

Ex. — Fossas  pedum  triginta  in  latitudinem  complures  facere 
instituit:  he  determined  to  make  several  ditches  thirty  feet  in 
breadth. 

The  Descriptive  Genitive  also  occurs,  thus,  Fossa  sex  pedum 
(—sex  pedes  lata). 

12.  In,  ex,  per,  with  the  name  of  a  people  should  be  trans- 
lated in,  into,  from.,  through,  the  country  of. 

Ex. — In  Latinis  (Latinos)  :  in  (into)  the  country  of  the 
Latins. 

13.  I.  Apud  is  used  with  the  name  of  an  author  referring  to 
his  writings. 

Ex. — Apud  Platonem:  in  (according  to)  Plato.  Apud  Ho- 
merum:  according  to  (in)  Homer. 

II.  In  with  the  Ablative  is  used  referring  to  a  literary  work. 

Ex. — In  Phaedro :  in  the  "Ptuedrus."  In  Originibus  :  in  the 
"Origins/3  In  Andria  :  in  the  "Andria." 

|4.  "At,"  "near,"  "before,"  "in  the  vicinity  of"  (common  in 
military  operations)  is  expressed  by  ad  or  apud.  (See  187.) 

Ex. — Ad  Erycem:  at  (before)  Eryx.  Ad  Rhodanum:  near 
the  Rhone.  Ad  extremas  f ossas :  at  the  ends  of  the  trenches. 
Pugna  apud  (ad)  Cannas:  the  battle  of  (at)  Cannae. 

Observe  also  the  common  use  of  the  adjective:  Cannensis 
pugna.  

THE  ABLATIVE, 

15.   The  Ablative  of  the  "at  relation"  or  place  where  occurs — 

1.  In  space,  with  a  preposition. 

Ex. — In  Italia.  In  agris.  In  muro.  In  monte.  Sub  monte 
(at  the  foot  of  the  mountain). 

-<n*£ 

2.  In  time,  withAa  preposition. 

Ex. — Eo  (illo)  die.  Eo  tempore.  Eo  anno.  Hieme  (in  win- 
ter). ^Estate.  Primo  vere  (=in  the  beginning  of  the  spring). 

3.  In  abstract  relations,  with  a  preposition. 

Ex. — In  periculo.  In  potestate.  In  fuga.  In  metu.  In 
amicitia. 

NOTE. — The  preposition  in  is  most  common,  but  sub,  cum  and 
pro  (rarely  super  and  subter)  are  used  in  their  own  significa- 
tions. 


10  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Names  of  Towns,  Cities  and  Small  Islands. 

16.  Names  of  towns,  cities  and  small  islands  are  used  in  the 
Locative  to  express  place  where. 

RULE  FOR  THE  LOCATIVE. — When  the  name  of  the  town,  etc., 
is  of  the  First  or  Second  Declension  singular,  the  Locative  is  like 
the  Genitive;  when  of  the  Third  Declension  or  plural  number  of 
any  declension,  the  Locative  is  like  the  Ablative. 

Ex. — Roma?  (at  or  in  Rome),  Corinthi.  Carthagine.  Athenis. 
Gadibus  (at  Gades,  i.  e.,  Cadiz). 

Likewise  observe  the  locative  forms  domi  (at  home),  ruri  (in 
the  country),  humi  (on  the  ground),  domi  militiaeque  (at  home 
and  in  the  field),  belli  domique  (in  war  and  in  peace). 

a.  The  form  domi  takes  the  possessive  in  the  Genitive. 

Ex. — Mese,  tuas,  sua3,  nostrae,  vestrae,  alienas,  domi. 

With  a  Genitive  of  the  possessor  either  domi  or  in  domo  may  be 
used.  Ex. — Domi  Caesaris,  or  in  domo  Cassaris. 

With  a  demonstrative  or  other  adjective,  the  Ablative  with  in 
must  be  used.  Ex. — In  hac,  ilia,  grata,  magnifies,  domo. 

6.  If  the  name  of  a  city,  town,  etc.,  of  the  First  or  Second  De- 
clension singular  is  associated  with  an  attributive,  the  Ablative 
with  or  without  in  may  be  used;  if  plural  or  of  the  Third  De- 
clension, the  Ablative  without  in  is  best. 

Ex. — In  ipsa  Alexandria,  (in)  Alba  Helvia.  Nova  Cartha- 
gine. Curibus  Sabinis,  =at  Cures  of  the  Sabines. 

c.  When  the  name  of  a  city  or  town,  etc.,  is  associated  with  an 
appositive  urls,  oppidum,  insula,  civitas,  etc.,  then  the  Ablative 
of  both  should  be  used  with  in  preceding;  but  if  the  name  of  the 
city,  etc.,  is  of  the  First  or  Second  Declension  and  singular,  then 
the  Locative  may  be  used. 

Ex. — In  insula  Lemno :  in  the  island  of  Lemnos.  In  urbe 
Roma  ( e ) .  In  oppido  Athenis. 

d.  When  the  appositive  urbs,  oppidum,  etc.,  has  an  adjective  or 
genitive  associated  with  it,  then  the  name  of  the  city,  etc.,  stands 
in  the  Locative,  while  the  appositive  follows  with  or  without  in. 

Ex. — Albas  in  urbe  opportuna:    at  Alba,  a  convenient  town. 
Antiochise  celebri  urbe :  at  Antioch,  a  populous  city. 
Neapoli  in  celeberrimo  oppido:    at  Naples,  a  very  populous 
town ;  or  in  the  very  populous  town  of  Naples. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  11 

Eem.  1.  Domus,  meaning  building,  family,  school,  or  anything 
else  than  home,  must  always  be  used  with  in  and  the  Ablative 
to  express  place  where. 

Eem.  2.  When  omnis,  totus,  cunctus,  universus  and  medius 
are  used  in  agreement  with  an  Ablative  of  place  where,  the  prep- 
osition in  may  be  used  or  omitted. 

Ex. — Tota  Italia.     (In)  media  urbe. 

Place  Where  in  Light  of  Cause,  Means,  Etc. 

17.  In  all  such  designations  of  place  as  may  be  regarded  in 
the  light  of  cause,  means,  instrument,  manner,  or  respect  (re- 
striction), the  Ablative  is  used  without  the  preposition  in.     (See 
23.) 

Ex. — Domitius  navibus  Massiliam  pervenit :  Domitius  arrived 
at  Marseilles  by  ship. 

Exercitum  (trans)  flumen  ratibus  transportavit :  he  carried 
his  army  across  the  river  on  rafts. 

Vinum  Tiberi  devectum :  wine  brought  down  on  the  Tiber. 

Pedibus :  on  foot.  Bello,  proelio  vincere :  to  conquer  in  war, 
in  battle. 

Kem.  3.  Locus,  meaning  place  or  locality,  with  an  attributive, 
may  or  may  not  have  the  preposition  in  in  the  Ablative  of  place 
where. 

Ex. — Omnibus  (in)  locis.     (In)  alio  loco.     (In)  his  locis. 

Loco,  meaning  in  a  condition  or  situation,  at  the  right  time,  in 
the  right  place,  in  place  of,  instead  of,  is  used  with  or  without — 
more  commonly  without — the  preposition. 

Ex. — Loco  amici  (cf.  numero  amicorum)  habere,  ducere,  etc.: 
to  consider  as  a  friend. 

Eem.  4.  The  preposition  is  also  frequently  omitted  with  parte, 
partibus,  and  regione,  regionibus  associated  with  an  attributive. 

The  Ablative  of  the  Whence  Relation,  or  Place  from  Which. 

18.  1.  In  space,  with  a  preposition,  i.  e.,  a  (ab) ,  e  (ex),  or  de. 
Ex. — Ex  Italia.    Ex  agris.    De  muro.    A  porta.    A  Caesare, 

2.  In  time,  with  a  preposition. 

Ex. — Ab  hora  quarta.  A  prima  luce  (=  from  daybreak).  Ex 
eo  tempore.  Ab  sole  orto  (=from  sunrise). 


12  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

3.  In  abstract  relations,  with  a  preposition. 

Ex. — Ex  terrore.    E  periculo.    Ab  amicitia. 

Rem.  1.  The  preposition  may  be  in  composition  with  the  verb, 
it  may  be  repeated,  or  a  different  preposition  may  be  used. 

Rem.  2.    Substantives  implying  motion  are  treated  as  verbs. 

Ex. — Excesses  e  vita :  departure  from  life.  Fugitivi  ab  dom- 
inis :  fugitives  from  their  masters. 

But  in  case  of  towns,  cities  and  small  islands  the  simple  Ab- 
lative is  used  to  express  place  whence.  Likewise  domo  (from 
home),  rure  (from  the  country),  humo  (from  the  ground). 

Ex. — Tarento:  from  Tarentum.  Athenis.  Carthagine. 
Capua.  Andibus :  from  Andes. 

Rem.  3.  A  or  ab  is  used  with  names  of  towns,  etc.,  to  mean 
from  the  vicinity  of,  from  before,  from  the  port  of,  or  simply  to 
indicate  distance  or  direction. 

Ex. — A  Capua:  from  before  (from  the  neighborhood  of) 
Capua.  Iter  a  Roma  ad  Neapolim:  the  journey  from  Rome  to 
Naples.  A  Brundisio :  from  the  port  of  Brundusium. 

Rem.  4.  The  point  from  which  distance  is  reckoned  is  always 
expressed  by  the  Ablative  with  a  or  ab,  even  in  case  of  towns, 
cities,  etc. 

Ex. — Bidis  oppidum  est  non  longe  a  Syracusis :  Bidis  is  a 
town  not  far  from  Syracuse. 

Longe  a  domo :  far  from  home.  Tria  milia  passuum  a  Sa- 
gunto :  three  miles  from  Saguntum. 

19.  o»  When  a  possessive  adjective  modifies  domo,  the  prepo- 
sition may  be  used  or  omitted.  With  any  other  adjective  or  with 
a  Genitive  of  the  possessor,  the  preposition  must  be  used. 

Ex. — Mea,  tua,  nostra,  etc.,  domo,  or  a  (ab),  e  (ex),  mea,  tua, 
nostra,  etc.,  domo. 

Ex  domo  Yergilii :  from  Virgil's  house  (=home)  ;  e  Pom- 
peiana  domo;  ex  hac,  grata,  domo. 

b.  When  the  name  of  the  city  or  town  is  associated  with  an- 
other word  (country,  province,  etc.)  requiring  the  preposition, 
it  is  best  to  write  each  according  to  its  own  rule. 

Ex. — Ex  Asia  et  Athenis,  or  Athenis  et  ex  Asia. 

Occasionally  the  name  of  the  city,  etc.,  precedes  in  the  Ablative, 
and  the  other  word  (country,  etc.)  follows  without  the  preposi- 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  13 

tion,  thus  conforming  to  the  construction  of  the  city,  town,  or 
small  island. 

Ex. — Lisso  Parthenisque  et  omnibus  castellis:  from  Lissus 
and  the  Partheni,  and  from  all  the  strongholds. 

c.  When  the  name  of  the  city,  etc.,  is  used  with  an  appositive 
urbe,  oppido,  or  insula,  then  the  preposition  precedes  both.  But 
if  the  appositive  has  an  adjective  or  Genitive  modifier,  it  is  better 
to  let  the  city,  etc.,  precede  the  preposition. 

Ex. — Ab  urbe  Eoma :  from  the  city  of  Rome.  Ex  oppido 
Gergovia :  from  the  town  of  Gergovia.  Tusculo,  ex  clarissimo 
municipio :  from  Tusculum,  a  very  celebrated  free-town. 

20.  1.  The  name  of  a  city  or  of  a  Roman  tribe  (family)  as 
a  place  of  residence  or  birth  is  written  in  the  Ablative  without  a 
preposition.  Ex. — N.  Magius  Cremona:  N.  Magius  of  (from) 
Cremona.  L.  Domitius  Cn.  f.  Fabia:  Lucius  Domitius,  son  of 
Cnseus,  of  the  Fabian  gens. 

Rein. — Sometimes  the  city  is  written  in  the  Ablative  with  a 
(ab) ,  but  not  in  Cicero  or  Caesar. 

2.  The  name  of  a  country  as  a  place  of  residence  or  birth  is 
always  written  in  the  Ablative  with  e  (ex). 

Ex. — Mittitur  Q.  Junius  ex  Hispania  quidam :  a  certain  Quin- 
tus  Junius  of  Spain  is  sent. 

3.  Instead  of  the  Ablative  of  city  or  country  the  adjective  is 
more  common. 

Ex. — Cratippus  Tyndaritanus :  Cratippus  of  Tyndaris.  C. 
Blossius  Cumanus :  Caius  Blossius  of  Cumaa,  or  a  Cuma3an. 
Alorcus  Hispanius :  Alorcus  a  Spaniard. 

21  With  movere,  cedere,  pellere  and  labi  the  omission  of  the 
preposition  is  frequent  in  the  whence  relation. 

Ex. — Loco  movere :  to  move  from  a  place  or  position.  Patria 
pellere:  to  drive  from  one's  country.  Loco  cedere:  to  retire 
from  a  position. 

22.  Tho  place  from  winch  embraces  all  local  designations. 
Ex. — Litters  ex  Gallia  a  Caesare  allatae  sunt:    letters  were 
brought  from  Caesar  in  Gaul  (=from  Gaul  from  Caesar).     Re- 


14  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

periebat  T.  Ampium  conatum  esse  pecunias  tol-lere  Epheso  ex 
f ano  Dianae :  he  found  out  that  Titus  Ampius  had  attempted  to 
take  away  money  from  the  temple  of  Diana  at  Ephesus. 

Vox  ab  aede  Junonis  ex  arce  exstitit:  a  voice  arose  from  the 
temple  of  Juno  in  the  citadel. 

23.  Cause.,  means  and  instrument  are  expressed  by  the  Ab- 
lative without  a  preposition. 

Cause  sometimes  allows  a  preposition.  See  following  exam- 
ples :  Alii  ab  numero  avium  eum  secutum  numerum  putant : 
some  think  that  he  adopted  that  number  from  the  number  of  the 
birds.  ^Eneas  ab  simili  clade  domo  profugus :  ^Eneas  a  fugitive 
from  home  in  consequence  of  a  similar  disaster.  Certa  de  causa : 
for  a  certain  reason.  Qua  de  causa :  for  which  reason.  Qua  ex 
re,  ex  quo :  wherefore. 

24.  The  Ablative  of  Respect  or  Restriction  occurs  with  verbs, 
adjectives  and  participles.     (See  6.) 

Ex. — Et  verbis,  re  non  erat:  and  so  it  was  in  word,  not  in 
reality. 

Yerbis  adhuc  lenior,  re  asperior :  as  yet  more  lenient  in  word, 
harsher  in  (point  of)  fact. 

Virtute  superare :  to  surpass  in  valor.  Viribuspar:  equal' in 
strength.  Similes  moribus :  alike  in  character.  Pedibus  claud- 
us :  lame  in  the  feet.  Captus  oculis :  blind.  Captus  mente :  in- 
sane. Crine  ruber:  red-haired. 

25.  The  Direct  Personal  Agent  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative 
with  a  or  ab. 

The  Indirect  Personal  Agent  is  expressed  by  per  and  the  Accu- 
sative (through  the  agency  of). 

26  The  Ablative  of  Manner  without  an  attributive  (adjective 
or  Genitive)  takes  cum;  with  an  attributive,  cum  may  be  omit- 
ted. Ex. — Cumcura;  but  magna  cura  (or  magna  cum  cura). 

NOTE. — Certain  set  expressions  omit  the  preposition,  as  ra- 
tione,  ordine,  iure,  iniuria,  clamore,  tiilentio,  merito,  dolo,  fraude, 
m,  ioco,  casu,  etc. 


1  I  A  N  D-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  15 

27.  The  Descriptive  Ablative,  or  Ablative  of  Quality,  like  the 
corresponding  Genitive,  must  have  an  attributive,  i.  e.,  an  adjec- 
tive or  Genitive.  Ex. — Vir  magna  virtute :  a  man  of  great 
bravery.  But,  vir  fortis :  a  man  of  bravery. 

a.  The  Descriptive  Ablative  must  be  used  of  form  and  appear- 
ance, of  characteristics  of  dress  or  person. 

Ex. — Mulieres  crinibus  passis:  women  with  dishevelled  hair. 
Puella  naso  adunco:  the  girl  with  the  turned-up  nose.  Boves 
mira  specie :  cows  of  striking  beauty. 

I).  The  Descriptive  Genitive  must  be  used  of  number,  measure, 
time,  space  or  class. 

Ex. — Puer  novem  annorum :  a  boy  of  nine  years.  Iter  decem 
dierum :  a  journey  of  ten  days.  Eiusdem  generis :  of  the  same 
kind. 

Beyond  these  restrictions,  the  two  constructions  coincide. 

Point  of  View,  Direction,  etc. 

28  The  Ablative  is  used  in  certain  cases  with  a  (ab),  e  (ex) 
to  denote  point  of  view,  direction,  side,  etc. 

Ex. — A  tergo :  on  the  rear.  A  fronte :  in  front.  Ab  utroque 
latere :  on  both  flanks.  Ab  ea  parte :  on  that  side.  Ab  oriente : 
on  the  east.  Ab  occidente:  in  the  west.  A  dextrp  cornu:  on 
the  right  wing.  Mettius  Curtius  ab  Sabinis  princeps :  Mettius 
Curtius,  the  leader  on  the  side  of  the  Sabines. 

Cum  prima  quies  silentiumque  ab  hostibus  fuit :  as  soon  as 
there  was  rest  and  silence  on  the  part  of  the  enemy. 

Utraque  ex  parte :  on  both  sides,  on  each  side.  Una  ex  parte : 
on  one  side.  Ex  omnibus  partibus :  on  all  sides.  Qua  ex  parte 
est  Hibernia :  on  which  side  Ireland  lies. 

29.  Prae,  with  the  Ablative  expressing  preventing  cause,  oc- 
curs after  a  negative  or  its  equivalent. 

Ex. — Plura  pra3  lacrimis  scribere  non  possum :  I  cannot  write 
more  for  tears. 

Qui  periculum  fortunarum  et  capitis  sui  pra?  mea  salute  ne- 
glexit:  who  disregarded  danger  to  his  fortunes  and  to  his  life 
for  my  safety. 


16  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

The  Ablative  with  Verbs  of  Removing,  etc. 

30.  The  Ablative  is  used  with  verbs  to  remove,  to  withhold,  to 
free,  to  abstain,  to  prevent,  to  keep  from,  to  cut  off,  to  desist,  to 
cheat,  to  rob,  to  rid,  to  deprive,  etc. 

A  preposition,  generally  ab,  may  often  be  used. 

Liberare  (to  free),  prohibere  (to  prohibit,  to  keep  away),  lax- 
are,  relaxare  (to  release),  abstinere  (to  abstain,  to  hold  off), 
vacare  (to  be  free),  intercludere  (to  cut  off,  to  separate),  desist- 
ere  (to  cease,  to  stand  off)  may  have,  and  sometimes  should  have, 
a  preposition,  as  when  Ablative  is  a  person. 

Levare,  relevare  (to  relieve),  carere  (to  be  without),  super- 
sedere  (to  refrain),  spoliare  (to  rob,  to  strip),  nudare,  exuere 
(to  strip),  privare,  orbare  (to  deprive),  fraudare,  defraudare  (to 
cheat)  should  be  used  without  a  preposition. 

Ex. — Metu,  cura,  periculo  aliquem  liberare:  to  free  any  one 
from  fear,  anxiety,  danger. 

Ab  insula  hostes  prohibere :  to  keep  the  enemy  away  from  the 
island. 

Milites  rapinis  prohibere:  to  restrain  the  soldiers  from 
plunder. 

Caesar  proelio  supersedere  (abstinere)  statuit:  Caesar  deter- 
mined to  hold  off  from  battle. 

Equites  ab  exercitu,  ab  oppido  intercludere :  to  cut  off  the 
cavalry  from  the  army,  from  the  town. 

ISTostros  commeatibus,  re  frumentaria  intercludere  (prohib- 
ere) :  to  cut  off  our  men  from  supplies,  from  provisions. 

Ablative  with  Verbs  to  Differ,  etc. 

31.  With  verbs  to  differ,  to  distinguish,  to  separate,  to  revolt 
from  (or,  at),  to  leave  off;  as,  differre,  dissidere,  discrepare,  dis- 
sentire  (to  differ),  distinguere,  separare,  dividere,  disiungere  (to 
distinguish,  to  separate),  deficere  (to  revolt  from),  abhorrere  (to 
revolt  at),  intermittere  (to  leave  off),  etc. — the  Ablatibe  with  the 
preposition  ab  is  the  rule. 

Ablative,  with  Verbs  of  Filling,  etc. 

32.  The  Ablative  of  Means  is  used  with  verbs  to  fill,  to  abound, 
to  enrich,  to  lack,  to  cover,  etc. ;   as,  implere,  explere,  complere 
(to  fill),  farcire,  refercire    (to  stuff,  to  cram),  cumulare   (to 


HAXD-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  17 

heap),  augere  (to  increase),  locupletare  (to  enrich),  abundare, 
affluere  (to  abound),  tegere  (to  cover),  carere,  egere,  indigere 
(to  be  without,  to  lack,  to  need),  satiare  (to  satisfy),  saturare  (to 
saturate),  ornare  (to  adorn),  obruere  (to  overwhelm),  etc. 

Rem. — Egere  and  indigere  are  also  used  with  the  Genitive. 

Cicero  prefers  the  Ablative  with  egere.,  and  the  Genitive  with 
indigere. 

Niti  and  Stare. 

33.  Note  the  Ablative  with  and  without  in  and  the  verbs  niti 
(to  rest,  to  rely,  to  depend  upon)  and  stare  (to  rest,  abide,  stand 
firm,  depend  upon) . 

Stare  +  a&,  cum,  pro  and  the  Ablative  means  "to  stand  by, 
on  the  side  of,  in  behalf  of." 

Ablative  with  Opus  and  Usus. 

34.  With  opus  (rarely  usus)  esse  (=to  be  needful,  wanting), 
the  Ablative  of  the  thing  needed  is  used  with  the  Dative  of  the 
person  who  needs.    In  this  case  the  phrase  is  impersonal. 

Less  frequent,  but  perfectly  good,  is  the  use  of  the  thing  needed 
as  the  subject  with  opus  as  the  predicate,  and  the  Dative  of  the 
person  who  needs.  In  this  case  the  phrase  is  personal. 

With  neuter  pronouns  and  adjectives  (hoc,  id,  illud,  quod,  quae, 
mnlta,  pauca,  etc.)  the  personal  form  should  be  used. 

Quid  and  nihil  are  often  used  as  adverbial  Accusatives  without 
affecting  the  construction. 

Note  the  frequent  use  of  the  Ablative  of  the  perfect  participle 
here. 

Ex. — Mihi  libris  opus  est,  or  libri  mihi  opus  sunt :  I  need 
books. 

Quae  nobis  opus  sunt :  those  things  which  are  needful  to  us. 

Maturate  opus  est :  there  is  need  of  haste. 

Facto  opus  est:  there  is  need  of  action,  something  must  be 
done. 

Adjectives  with  the  Ablative. 

35.  Such  adjectives,  as  a  rule,  follow  the  usage  of  kindred 
verbs.     The  ground  of  the  construction  may  be  (1)  Respect  or 
Restriction,  (2)  Cause,  (3)  Separation  or  Exemption,  (4)  Full- 
ness, Abundance,  etc.     Hence: 


18  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

1.  Powerful  in,  equal  in,  superior  in,  strong  in,  and  the  like; 
as,  potens,  par,  superior,  validus,  etc. 

Ex. — Par  viribus :   equal  in  strength. 

Tanta  opibus  Etruria  erat :  Etruria  was  so  strong  in  re- 
sources. 

2.  Famous  for,  remarkable  on  account  of,  evident  from,  etc. 
(often  with  a  preposition,  usually  ex)  ;    as,  nobilis,  clarus,  in- 
signis,  manifestos,  etc.     Also  joyful  at,  pleased  with,  troubled 
over,  proud  of,  content  with,  etc. ;    as,  laetus,  maestus,  tristis, 
anxius,  sollicitus,  superbus,  contentus. 

Ex. — Prudentia  clarus:    renowned  for  wisdom. 
Suis  rebus  contentus :   satisfied  with  his  own  possessions. 
Adjectives  like  solicitus  and  anxius  may  have  de  (about,  con- 
cerning, over). 

3.  Free  from,  exempt,  deprived  of,  etc.  (with  or  without  ab,  as 
a  rule)  ;   as,  liber,  vacuus,  orbus,  nudus,  tutus,  alienus,  di versus, 
immunis,  etc. 

Ex. — Liber  (a)  molestiis:   free  from  annoyances. 
Vacuus  (a)  culpa:   void  of  (without)  blame. 
Nudus  agris:   destitute  (stripped)  of  lands. 
A  periculo  tutus :   safe  from  danger. 

4.  Full  of,  abounding  in,  rich  in,  loaded  with,  etc. ;   as,  plenus, 
refertus,  abundans,  praeditus,  dives,  locuples,  opulentus,  onustus, 
gravis,  etc. 

Ex. — Lagtitia  plenus :   full  of  joy. 

Vita  referta  bonis :   a  life  filled  with  blessings. 

Urbs  statuis  dives :   a  city  rich  in  statues. 

Latrones  prseda  onusti :   robbers  loaded  with  booty. 

Naves  hostilibus  spoliis  graves :  ships  heavily  laden  with  spoils 
of  the  enemy. 

Graves  fructu  vites :  vines  laden  with  fruit. 

Kem. — Plenus  (full)  is  more  common  with  the  Genitive. 

Kern.  2.  Eefertus  (stuffed;  full)  is  more  usual  with  the  Ab- 
lative of  things  and  the  Genitive  of  persons. 

5.  Dignus  (worthy),  indignus,  and  fretus  (relying  on)  take 
the  Ablative. 

Ex. — Laude  dignus :   worthy  of  praise. 

Auctoritate  fretus:  relying  on  his  authority  (influence). 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  19 

Ablative  of  Excess  or  Difference. 

36.  Excess  or  Difference  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative. 

Ex. — Turres  denis  pedibus  quam  murus  altiores  sunt:  the 
towers  are  ten  feet  higher  (=higher  by  ten  feet)  than  the  wall. 

Sol  multis  partibus  maior  (est)  quam  terra  universal  the  sun 
is  many  parts  larger  than  the  whole  earth. 

So — multo,  paulo,  tanto,  aliquanto,  etc. 

The  Accusative  is  irregular,  but  not  uncommon,  especially  the 
neuters  tantum,  multum,  paulum,  aliquantum,  etc. 

Ablative  of  Price. 

37.  1-  Definite  price  or  value  must  be  expressed  by  the  Ab- 
lative. 

Ex. — Decem  talentis:    for  (at)  ten  talents. 

2.  Indefinite  or  general  value  is  expressed  by  the  Genitive, 
less  often  by  the  Ablative. 

Ex. — Tanti,  so  much;  quanti,  how  much,  as  much;  pluris, 
more;  minoris,  less;  magni,  at  a  high  price;  parvi,  at  a  low 
price,  etc. 

Ablative  of  Material. 

38.  The  material  of  which  anything  is  made  with  verbs  to 
make,  to  fashion,  to  carve,  to  mold,  etc.  (facere,  fingere,  fundere, 
dolare,  etc.)  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative  with  ex  (rarely  de). 
When  no  verb  or  participle  is  expressed,  use  ex  -f-  Ablative,  or  an 
adjective  instead. 

Ex. — Naves  e  robore  f actas :  ships  made  of  oak. 
Anulus  ex  auro,  or  anulus  aureus :  a  gold  ring. 
Mensae  e  marmore,  or  mensas  marmoreae:    tables  of  marble, 
or  marble  tables. 

Ablative  with  Afficere. 

39.  The  Ablative  of  Means  with  afficere  must  be  noted. 
This  verb  literally  means  "to  affect,"  but  its  use  is  idiomatic 

and  the  translations  are  varied.  The  thing  with  which  a  person 
or  thing  is  affected  or  visited  is  put  in  the  Ablative,  and  the  verb 
generally  takes  its  meaning. 

Ex. — Aliquem  laude  afficere :  to  praise  any  6ne. 

Aliquem  supplicio,  praemio,  cruciatu,  timore,  honore,  admira- 


20  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

tione,  morte,  iniuria,  etc.,  afficere :   to  punish,  to  reward,  to  tor- 
ture, to  terrify,  to  honor,  to  admire,  to  kill,  to  injure  any  one. 

Pcena,  iniuria,  voluptate,  laude,  etc.,  affici:  to  suffer  punish- 
ment (to  be  punished),  to  receive  injury,  to  enjoy  pleasure, 
praise,  etc. 

THE  DATIVE. 

40.  1.  A  Dative  object  is  used  with  intransitive  verbs  of  Ad- 
vantage and  Disadvantage,  Yielding  and  Kesisting,  Pleasure  and 
Displeasure, Bidding  and  Forbidding,  as  prodesse(to  do  good  to), 
favere  (to  favor),  nocere  (to  do  harm  to),  parcere  (to  spare),  in- 
dulgere,  cedere  (to  give  way  to),  servire  (to  serve),  parere,  oboe- 
dire,  obtemperare  (to  obey),  placere  (to  give  pleasure  to),  ignos- 
cere  (to  pardon),  invidere  (to  envy),  resistere,  repugnare  (to 
resist),  credere  (to  believe,  to  trust),  insidiari  (to  lie  in  wait 
for),  imperare  (to  order,  give  orders  to),  suadere,  persuadere  (to 
persuade,  to  advise),  irasci  (to  become  angry  at),  obtrectare  (to 
oppose,  injure),  obstare  (to  stand  in  way  of),  minari,  imminere, 
impendere  (to  threaten,  hang  over),  studere  (to  be  eager  for), 
maledicere  (to  abuse),  metuere  (to  fear  for),  consulere  (to  con- 
sult for,  to  consult  the  interest  of),  nubere  (to  marry — of  a  wo- 
man), gratulari  (to  wish  well,  to  congratulate),  etc. 

Rem. — Such  verbs  are  impersonal  in  passive,  and  Dative  is 
retained.  (See  158.) 

2.  Note  here  also  the  dative  with  many  verbs  compounded  with 
the  prepositions  ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub, 
super. 

If  the  verb  is  transitive,  the  Accusative  and  Dative  are  used. 

Ex. — Adesse,  interesse  (to  be  present  at  or  with),  prasesse  (to 
be  in  command  of),  praeficere  (to  place  in  command  of),  ante- 
ponere  (to  prefer  to),  succensere  (to  be  angry  at),  succurrere 
(to  hurry  to  the  aid  of),  subvenire  (to  come  to  the  aid  of),  sum- 
mi  ttere  (to  send  to  the  aid  of),  prefer  re  (to  prefer  to),  occurrere 
(to  hurry  to  meet),  obvenire  (to  come  to  meet),  etc.,  etc. 

NOTE. — Fidere  and  confidere  (to  trust,  to  confide  in)  take  the 
Dative  of  the  person  and  the  Ablative  of  the  thing.  Dative  of  the 
thing  is  also  allowed. 

Diffidere  (to  distrust)  takes  dative  of  person  or  thing;  but  Ab- 
lative of  thing  may  be  used. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  21 

41.  Verbs  of  Giving  and  Putting  take  the  Accusative  with  the 
Dative,  or  the  Accusative  with  the  Ablative.     There  are  only  a 
few  of  these. 

(tibi  librum:  I  present  (to)  you  a  book. 
°  ( te  libro :  I  present  you  with  a  book. 
(  urbi  murum:   I  put  a  wall  around  the  city. 
^  urbem  muro :  I  surround  the  city  with  a  wall. 

So  with  aspergere,  inspergere  (to  sprinkle),  circumfundere, 
circumicere  (to  surround),  circumligare  (to  bind  around),  im- 
pertire  (to  endow,  to  bestow)^  induere  (to  clothe,  to  put  on), 
exuere  (to  strip  of,  or  off),  intercludere  (to  cut  off). 

Eem. — ISTote  the  verb  interdicere  with  Accusative  and  Dative, 
or  Dative  and  Ablative. 

Alicui  aliquid  interdicere :  to  forbid  anyone  anything. 

Alicui  aliqua  re  interdicere:  to  prohibit  anyone  from  any- 
thing. 

The  Dative  with  Verbs  of  «« Taking  Away." 

42.  The  Dative  is  used  with  certain  transitive  verbs  having 
the  general  signification  of  taking  away.     The  translation  is 
from. 

The  Dative  can  only  be  used  when  the  relation  of  personal  in- 
terest (advantage  or  disadvantage)  is  involved;  otherwise  the 
Ablative  is  used. 

Such  verbs  are  generally  compounded  with  a  preposition,  ab, 
ad,  de,  ex,  prae>  or  sub;  as,  demere,  adimere,  eripere,  auferre,  de- 
trahere,  extorquere,  subducere,  deducere,  etc. 

Ex. — J^duis  libertatem  eripere:  to  take  away  liberty  from 
the  JMuans. 

Somnum  mihi  ademit :  it  took  away  my  sleep  from  me. 

Dative  with  Esse. 

43.  Esse  with  the  Dative  (Possessive  Dative)  is  translated  "to 
have."    The  possession  of  a  quality,  however,  is  expressed  by  esse 
or  inesse  with  in  and  the  Ablative. 

Habere  -f-  Accusative  may  be  used  anywhere. 

Dative  of  the  Name. 

44.  With  esse,  dare,  indere,  adder e,  redder e,  imponere,  man- 
ere,  etc.,  and  a  substantive — as  nomen,  cognomen — the  name  is 


22  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

attracted  into  the  Dative  which  is  the  case  of  the  person  or  thing 
named. 

The  name  may  be  in  apposition  with  nomen,  cognomen,,  etc. 
Rarely  is  the  Genitive  of  the  name  depending  on  nomen,,  etc., 
used. 

Ex. — My  name  is  Marcus — 

Mihi  nomen  Marco  est. 

Mihi  nomen  Marcus  est. 

Mihi  nomen  Marci  est.     (Do  not  use.) 

Dative  with  Licet. 

45.  Notice  another  case  of  attraction  with  licet;    in  late 
Latin  and  in  poetry  with  necesse  est,,  vacat,  contingit,  etc. 

1.  Mihi  securo  esse  non  licet :  I  am  not  allowed  (I  am  not  free) 
to  be  undisturbed. 

Or,  2.  Mihi  securum  esse  non  licet. 

3.  Securum  esse  non  licet  (regular  form  when  Dative  is  omit- 
ted) :   one  is  not  allowed  to  be  undisturbed. 

4.  Securo  esse  non  licet.     (Do  not  use.) 

The  Double  Dative. 

46.  With  the  verbs  to  be,  to  give,  to  impute,  to  become,  to  have, 
to  go,  to  come,  to  lead,  to  send,  to  leave,  etc.  (esse,  tribuere,  fieri, 
habere,  ire,  venire,  ducere,  mittere,  relinquere,  etc.)  two  Datives 
are  used,  one  of  the  object  or  end  for  which,  the  other  of  the  per- 
son (or  thing)  to  whom.    The  latter  is  often  not  expressed. 

The  words  auxilio,  subsidio,  and  praesidio  occur  frequently  in 
this  construction  in  military  operations. 

Ex. — Sibi  curaB  esse :  to  be  an  object  of  care  to  one,  to  have  a 
care  for. 

Curae  sibi  habere:  to  have  as  an  object  of  attention,  to  at- 
tend to. 

Mihi  esse  cordi :  to  lie  at  my  heart ;  to  be  agreeable,  dear  to  me. 

Alicui  adiumento  esse :  to  be  an  assistance  to  anyone. 

Quod  monumento  sit  posteris :  which  shall  be  a  memorial  to 
coming  generations. 

Quod  illi  tribuebatur  ignavias :  which  was  imputed  to  him  for 
cowardice. 

His  odio  esse :  to  be  an  object  of  hatred  to  these. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  23 

Pausanias  rex  Lacedaemoniorum  venit  Atticis  auxilio:  Pau- 
sanias,  king  of  the  Lacedaemonians,  came  to  the  help  of  the 
Attics. 

Caesar  tres  legiones  subsidio  sociis  misit:  Caesar  sent  three 
legions  to  the  assistance  of  the  allies. 

Septimam  legionem  presidio  castris  reliquit:  he  left  the 
seventh  legion  as  a  guard  to  the  camp. 

Caesar  receptui  cani  iussit:  Caesar  ordered  a  retreat  to  be 
sounded  (Bordered  it  to  be  sounded  for  a  retreat). 

Kem. — Instead  of  the  Dative  of  the  end  or  purpose  for  which, 
an  appositive  Nominative  or  Accusative  may  be  used,  and  some- 
times the  Accusative  with  ad  or  in  final.  (See  4. ) 

Dative  with  a  Noun. 

47.  The  Dative  should  not  be  used  depending  on  a  noun.    The 
Objective  Genitive  or  its  equivalent  is  the  usual  substitute. 

Ex. — Periculum  rei  publicae  (Genitive)  :  danger  to  the  state. 

The  Dative  does  sometimes  occur  with  nouns  derived  from 
verbs  requiring  Dative,  when  the  noun  seems  to  retain  verbal 
force. 

Ex. — Obtemperatio  scriptis  legibus :  obedience  to  written  laws. 

Dative  with  Adjectives. 

48.  The  Dative  is  used  with  such  adjectives  as  like,  unlike, 
different,  suitable,  unsuitable,  agreeable,  disagreeable,  easy,  diffi- 
cult, near,  friendly,  hostile,  painful,  troublesome,  equal,  unequal, 
useful,  injurious,  faithful,  unfaithful,  pleasant,  advantageous, 
disadvantageous,  etc. 

NOTE  1.  Similis  and  dissimilis  are  also  used  with  the  Genitive; 
and  with  persons,  the  Genitive  is  the  rule. 

NOTE  2.  With  adjectives  of  adaptedness,  inclination,  readi- 
ness and  tendency,  the  Accusative  with  ad  and  sometimes  in  is 
common — aptus,  idoneus,  habilis,  accommodatus,  utilis,  facilis, 
paratus,  pronus,  propensus,  proclivis,  intentus,  promptus. 

With  these  adjectives  ad  with  the  Accusative  of  the  Gerund 
is  frequent. 

NOTE  3.  Alienus  (foreign,  strange)  takes  the  Dative,  or  the 
Ablative  with  or  without  ab. 

NOTE  4.  Note  pro-pe  and  its  derivatives. 


24:  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

f  Prope  —  Ace.  ,  or  Abl.  with  ab.  \  near. 
I  Propius—  Ace.,  Abl.  withal,  Dat.  (rare):  nearer. 

Adv.  and  Prep.  <j   proxime_Acc.  ,  Abl.  with  ab  (rare),  Dat,  (rare):  near. 

est,  next. 

f  Propior—  Dat.,  Ace.  (not  in  Cic.),  Abl.  with  ab.  (rare): 

nearer. 

AdJ'  1  Proximus—  Dat.,  Ace.  (not  in  Cic.),  Abl.  with  ab.  :  near- 
est, next. 


Dative  with  Obviam  and  Obvius,  a,  um. 

49.  Obviam  and  obvius,  a,  um,  are  used  in  many  combina- 
tions in  the  sense  of  to  meet,  in  the  way  of,  against,  etc.,  and 
always  with  the  Dative.  They  occur  in  a  good  or  bad  sense. 

1.  Alicui  obviam  fieri:   to  meet  some  one;    alicui  obviam  ire, 
venire,  advenire,  procedere,  prodire,  progredi,  exire,  properare, 
proficisci,  mittere,  etc.  :    to  go,  come,  advance,  go  out,  hasten, 
start,  send,  etc.,  to  meet  some  one. 

2.  Alicui  obvius,  a,  um  esse,  fieri:   to  meet  some  one;   alicui 
obvius,  a,  um  ire,  venire,  procedere,  occurrere,  mittere,  ferre,  etc.  : 
to  go,  come,  advance,  hurry,  send,  bring,  etc.,  to  meet  some  one. 


THE  GENITIVE. 
Subjective  and  Objective  Genitive. 

50.  1-  The  Subjective  Genitive  may  be  translated  with  "by," 
"from,"  or  "belonging  to";  the  Objective  Genitive  with  "to," 
"for,"  "over,"  "toward."  Either  may  be  replaced  by  an  adjec- 
tive. 

Ex. — Subj. — Platonis  dicta:  sayings  of  (by)  Plato.  Obj. — 
Periculum  rei  publicae :  danger  to  the  state. 

2.  Instead  of  the  Objective  Genitive  you  may  substitute  the 
Accusative  with  in   (friendly  or  hostile  sense),  erg  a   (friendly 
sense),  or  adversus. 

Ex. — Amor  erga  (in)  Caesarem :   love  for  Caesar. 
Odium  in  ISTeronem :   hatred  to  Nero. 

3.  The  Genitive  of  personal  pronouns  is  objective.    The  subjec- 
tive must  be  expressed  by  the  possessive  adjectives  meus,  tuus, 
suus,  noster,  and  v ester.    Alienus  is  also  used  instead  of  the  Sub- 
jective Genitive  of  alius. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  •  25 

Ex. — Hie  liber  meus :  this  book  of  mine.  Mea  benevolentia : 
my  good-will,  i.  e.,  felt  by  me. 

But,  benevolentia  mei  (=erga  me),  good- will  for,  towards  me. 

Excep. — With  iniuria  the  possessive  adjective  represents  either 
a  Subjective  or  Objective  Genitive. 

Ex. — Mea  iniuria :  wrong  done  by  me,  or  wrong  done  to  me. 

Genitive  with  a  Possessive. 

51.  The  appositive  of  a  Genitive  involved  in  a  possessive  ad- 
jective must  likewise  be  in  the  Genitive. 

Ex. — Meo  iussu  consulis :   by  order  of  me  the  consul. 

Moreover,  an  adjective  or  participle  limiting  such  an  involved 
Genitive  must  also  be  in  the  Genitive. 

Ex. — Urbs  mea  unius  opera  f uit  salva :  the  city  was  saved  by 
my  exertions  alone. 

Nostra  ipsorum  libertas :   our  own  liberty. 

Nomen  meum  absentis — mese  prassentis  preces:  my  name 
when  absent — my  entreaties  when  present. 

Nostrum  and  Vestrum. 

52.  The  forms  nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  as  Partitive 
Genitives  of  nos  and  vos. 

Ex. — Uterque  nostrum :  each  (both)  of  us. 

Bern. — Nostrum  and  vestrum  must  also  be  used  with  omnium. 

Ex. — Salus  omnium  nostrum :   the  welfare  of  us  all. 

53.  The  Partitive  Genitive  may  be  substituted  by  ex  or  de 
with  the  Ablative,  by  inter  with  the  Accustative,  and  rarely  by  in 
with  the  Ablative. 

Ex. — Multi  ex  nostris :  many  of  our  men.  Decem  de  hostibus : 
ten  of  the  enemy.  Inter  Romanes  f ortissimus :  the  bravest  man 
among  the  Romans. 

Unus,  when  not  followed  by  alter  or  alius,  always  takes  ex  or 
de  and  the  Ablative. 

Ex. — Unus  ex  (de)  tribunis :   one  of  the  tribunes. 

Genitive  of  Characteristic,  Etc. 

54.  The  Subjective  Genitive  with  esse=to  be  the  mark,  part, 
duty,  office  or  characteristic  of. 

The  following  table  shows  use  of  (1)  substantives,  (2)  adjec- 


26  .HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

tives  of  Second  Declension,  (3)  adjectives  of  Third  Declension  of 
two  or  three  endings,  (4)  adjectives  of  Third  Declension  of  one 
ending,  (5)  combination: 
A.I.  Stultitia  est :  it  is  folly. 

2.  Stultitiae  est :  it  is  the  mark  of  folly. 

3.  Stultum  est :   it  is  foolish. 

4.  Stulti  est :  it  is  the  mark  of  a  fool. 

B.  1.  Turpitude  est :   it  is  infamy. 

2.  Turpitudinis  est :  it  is  the  mark  of  infamy. 

3.  Turpe  est :  it  is  infamous. 

C.  1.  Sapientia  est:   it  is  wisdom. 

2.  Sapientise  est :  it  is  the  mark  of  wisdom. 

3.  Sapientis  est:   it  is  the  mark  of  a  wise  man.     (Never,  sa- 

piens est.) 

D.  1.  Stultum  ac  turpe:   it  is  foolish  and  infamous. 

2.  Stulti  ac  turpis :  it  is  the  mark  of  a  fool  and  a  dishonorable 

man. 

3.  Stulti  et  amentis :   it  is  the  mark  of  a  fool  and  a  madman. 

4.  Stultum  et  amentis :  it  is  foolish  and  silly. 

5.  Turpis  et  amentis :   it  is  the  mark  of  a  base  and  senseless 

man. 

•  6.  Turpe  et  amens :  it  is  base  and  silly. 

CAUTION. — In  case  of  personal  pronouns,  use  the  possessive 
adjective  in  the  neuter,  meum,  tuum,  etc.  Ex. — Est  tuum  fac- 
ere :  it  is  yours,  your  part,  or  your  duty  to  do  so  and  so. 

NOTE. — With  the  Genitive  above  given  officium,  munus,  pro- 
prius  and  sometimes  pars  are  used. 

Genitive  with  Esse  and  Fieri. 

55.  The  Subjective  Genitive  is  used  with  esse  and  fieri — to  be- 
long to,  to  be  or  become  the  property  of,  etc.  In  a  personal  re- 
lation esse  +  Genitive  may  mean  to  belong  to  the  party  or  fac- 
tion of,  to  be  on  the  side  of  (=cum  +  Ablative). 

Ex. — Circa  omnia  hostium  erant:  everything  around  was  in 
the  hands  of  the  enemy. 

Praedam  captae  urbis  edixit  militum  fore :  he  gave  out  that  the 
plunder  of  the  city  when  captured  would  belong  to  the  soldiers. 

Et  iam  omnia  trans  Hiberum  praeter  Saguntinos  Carthaginian- 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  27 

slum  erant :    and  now  everything  across  the  Ebro  was  in  the 
power  of  the  Carthaginians,  except  the  Saguntines. 

Prope  omnis  senatus  Hannibalis  erat :  almost  the  whole  senate 
was  on  the  side  of  Hannibil  (=cum  Hannibale). 

CAUTION. — Totus  or  a  possessive  agrees  with  the  subject  of 
esse,  in  which  case  totus  may  be  translated  as  an  adverb. 

Ex. — Urbs  tota  est  nostra :  the  city  is  entirely  in  favor  of  us 
(or,  the  whole  city,  etc.). 

Note  here,  too,  the  use  of  facere  (fieri)  with  ditionis  or  postes- 
tatis — to  bring  (to  be  brought)  under  the  sway  or  power  of. 

Ex. — Omnem  oram  usque  ad  Iberum  Romanae  ditonis  fecit: 
he  brought  all  the  coast  as  far  as  the  Ebro  under  Roman  sway. 

Verbs  of  Reminding,  Etc. 

56.  Verbs  of  reminding,  admonishing,  advising,  etc.,  take  the 
Objective  Genitive,  de  with  the  Ablative,  or  the  Accusative  of  a 
neuter  pronoun  or  adjective  (id,  hoc,  illud,  multa,  qua3,  etc.) .  In 
the  latter  case  the  verb  would  have  two  Accusatives. 

Such  verbs  are  monere,  admonere,  commonere.,  commonefacere. 

a.  Monere  and  commonere.  These  verbs  do  not  take  the  Gen- 
itive in  good  prose.  Use  instead  de  with  the  Ablative  or  the 
Accusative  of  a  neuter  pronoun. 

Ex. — Vos  id  unum  moneo :  I  remind  (warn)  you  of  (=as  to) 
this  one  thing. 

Oro  ut  Tarentiam  moneatis  de  testamento :  I  beg  you  to  re- 
mind Tarentia  of  the  will. 

Rem. — A  neuter  Accusative  in  the  active  construction  is  re- 
tained in  the  passive. 

Ex. — Nee  ea,  quaa  ab  ea  monemur,  audimus:  and  we  do  not 
heed  those  things  of  which  we  are  reminded  by  her. 

1).  Admonere  takes  the  Genitive,  de  with  the  Ablative,  or  the 
Accusative  of  a  neuter  pronoun. 

Ex. — Admonitus  huius  alieni  asris :  reminded  of  this  debt. 

Legates  miserunt  qui  admonerent  fcederis  eum  Romani :  they 
sent  ambassadors  to  remind  him  of  the  treaty  with  the  Romans. 

In  epistola  de  sede  Telluris  et  de  porticu  Catuli  me  admones : 
in  your  letter  you  remind  me  of  the  temple  of  Earth  and  the  por- 
tico of  Catulus. 


28  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

De  quo  (prcelio)  vos  paulo  ante  invitus  admonui:  of  which  I 
unwillingly  reminded  you  a  little  while  ago. 

Earn  rem  (—id)  nos  locus  admonuit:  the  place  admonished 
us  of  that  event. 

c.  Commonefacere  takes  Genitive  or  de  with  Ablative. 

Ex. — Te  veteris  amicitiae  commonef ecit :  he  reminded  you  of 
your  old  friendship. 

Verbs  of  Remembering  and  Forgetting. 

57.  Verbs  of  Eemembering  and  Forgetting  take  the  Objective 
Genitive;  but  the  Accusative  is  also  used,  especially  of  things, 
and  still  more  particularly  of  neuter  pronouns. 

1.  Meminisse:  Genitive,  Accusative,  or  de  with  Ablative. 

Ex. — Animus  praateritorum  meminit:  the  mind  recalls  the 
past. 

Mei  memineris :  you  will  remember  me. 

Constantiae  tuoa  memini :   I  remember  your  constancy. 

Cinnam  memini :   I  remember  Cinna. 

Omnia  meminit :   he  remembers  everything. 

Forsan  et  haec  olim  meminisse  iuvabit:  some  day  perhaps  it 
will  be  pleasant  to  remember  even  these  hardships. 

De  Planco  memini:  I  remember  (about)  Plancus. 

2.  Commeminisse  takes  the  Accusatvie. 

3.  Oblivisci  takes  the  Genitive  of  persons,  and  the  Genitive  or 
Accusative  of  things. 

Ex. — Oblitus  sum  mei :  I  have  forgotten  myself. 

Si  nostri  oblitus  es :  if  you  have  forgotten  me. 

Nee  tamen  Epicuri  obliviscor:  and  yet  I  do  not  forget 
Epicurus. 

Eecentium  iniuriarum  oblivisci :  to  forget  recent  injuries. 

Ut  nostrae  dignitatis  simus  obliti :  so  that  I  have  forgotten  my 
dignity. 

Nostrum  officium  obliviscimur :  we  forget  our  duty. 

Tu  qui  oblivisci  nihil  soles  nisi  iniurias :  you  who  are  wont  to 
forget  nothing  except  (but)  wrongs. 

4.  Recordari  takes  Accusative,  de  with  Ablative,  rarely  the 
Genitive  in  Cicero. 

Ex. — Recordare  tuas  epistolas :   recall  your  letters. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  29 

Pueritiae  memoriam  recorder :  I  recall  the  memory  of  my  boy- 
hood. 

•Et  vocem  Anchisa?  magni  vultumque  recorder:  and  I  call  to 
mind  the  voice  and  countenance  of  the  great  Anchises. 

Invitus  recorder  de  hoc  homine:  I  unwillingly  recollect  this 
man. 

Flagitiorum  suorum  recordabitur :  he  will  remember  his  own 
shameful  deeds. 

Eem. — With  recordari,  the  Accusative  is  by  far  most  common 
with  things,  while  de  with  Ablative  may  be  used  of  persons. 

5.  Eeminisci  take  Genitive  or  Accusative. 

Ex. — Reminisceretur  et  veteris  incommodi  populi  Romani  et 
pristinae  virtutis  Helvetiorum :  let  him  remember  both  the  old 
disaster  of  the  Roman  people  and  the  former  valor  of  the  Hel- 
vetians. 

Dulces  moriens  reminiscitur  Argos :  dying  he  remembers  sweet 
Argos. 

Rem. — Verbs  of  remembering  and  forgetting  may  be  used  with 
the  Accusative  and  Infinitive. 

Moreover,  verbs  of  remembering,  especially  memini,  are  used 
with  the  Present  Infinitive,  even  of  a  past  occurrence,  when  the 
matter  lies  within  one's  personal  experience,  when  he  himself 
was  present  to  hear,  see,  etc. 

Ex. — Memini  te  mihi  narrare:  I  remember  your  telling  me 
(that  you  told  me). 

Meministine  me  in  senatu  dicere?  do  you.  remember  that  I 
said  in  the  senate,  etc. 

In  Mentem  Venire  and  Certiorem  Facere. 

58.  1.  Note  here  the  phrase  in  mentem  venire  -{-  Dative  of 
person,  and  the  Objective  Genitive  of  a  person  or  thing.  The 
phrase  is  impersonal  except  in  case  of  neuter  pronouns.  The  per- 
sonal construction  (i.  e.,  Nominative  instead  of  Genitive)  is 
found,  but  in  Cicero  only  with  a  neuter  pronoun  or  res. 

Ex. — Venit  mihi  Platoriis  in  mentem:  I  am  reminded  of 
Plato,  or  Plato  comes  to  my  mind. 

Mihi  solet  in  mentem  venire  illius  temporis:  I  am  usually  re- 
minded of  that  time. 


30  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Hsec  (so  also,  id,  hoc,  quod,  quae,  etc.)  ei  fere  in  mentem  ven- 
iebant :  these  things  generally  occurred  to  him. 

But:  Non  venit  in  mentem  pugna  apud  Eegillum  lacum? 
(Livy)  :  does  not  the  battle  of  (—at)  Lake  Kegillus  come  to 
mind? 

2.  Certiorem  facere  (passive,  certior  fieri),  "to  inform,"  takes 
the  Objective  Genitive  or  de  with  Ablative.  Likewise,  mentionem 
facere  (to  make  mention  of). 

Judicial  Verbs. 

59.  A.  Verbs  of  accusing,  charging,  arraigning,  convicting, 
condemning  and  acquitting  take  the  Genitive  of  the  charge 
(crime)  or  punishment.  Such  verbs  are  accusare,  reum  facere, 
reus  esse,  arguere,  insimulare,  arcessere  (to  accuse,  to  charge)  ; 
damnare,  condemnare,  convincere  (to  condemn,  to  convict) ;  ab- 
solvere  (to  acquit),  etc. 

Ex. — Miltiades  accusatus  est  proditionis:  Miltiades  was  ac- 
cused of  treason. 

Aliquem  accusare  capitis:  to  bring  a  capital  charge  against 
any  one. 

Aliquem  sceleris,  avaritiae,  csedis,  furti,  maiestatis,  etc.,  accus- 
are, insimulare,  etc. :  to  accuse  any  one  of  crime,  avarice,  murder, 
theft,  high  treason,  etc. 

Capitis  damnare :  to  condemn  to  death. 

Quos  pecunlge  captae  arcessebat :  whom  he  accused  of  having 
taken  money. 

Improbitatis  absolutus  es :  you  were  acquitted  (or,  stand  ac- 
quitted) of  dishonor. 

ludex  eum  furti  absolvit :  the  judge  acquitted  him  of  theft. 

B.  The  charge  or  punishment  may  be  expressed  ( 1 )  by  de  with 
Ablative,  (2)  by  nomine  or  crimine  +  Genitive  (="011  the 
charge  of,"  "for  the  crime  of."  This  is  a  very  common  turn), 
(3)  by  simple  Ablative. 

Ex. —  (1)  Aliquem  de  praevaricatione  absolvere:  to  acquit  any 
one  of  prevarication. 

Gabinium  de  ambitu  reum  fecit  P.  Sulla:  Publius  Sulla 
charged  Gabinius  with  bribery. 

Aliquem  de  vi,  de  veneficiis,  de  pecuniis  repetundis  accusare, 
etc. :  to  accuse  (condemn,  etc.)  any  one  of  violence,  of  poisoning, 
of  extortion. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  31 

(2)  Aliquem   nomine    (crimine)    coniurationis,   cadis,   etc., 
damnare  (accusare,  etc.)  :  to  condemn  (accuse,  etc.)  any  one  for 
conspiracy,  murder,  etc.     Very  frequent. 

(3)  Damnare  capite:   to  condemn  to  death. 

Suspicione  eum  absolvere:  to  declare  him  innocent  of  sus- 
picion. 

Scsevola  aliis  criminibus  condemnatus  erat:  Scaevola  stood 
condemned  (=had  been  condemned)  for  other  crimes. 

NOTE  1.  Multare  takes  Ablative  always. 

Ex. — Aliquem  morte  multare :   to  punish  any  one  with  death. 

Agri  parte  multatis  in  centum  annos  indutise  data?:  having 
been  mulcted  in  a  part  of  their  land,  a  truce  was  granted  to  them 
for  a  hundred  years. 

NOTE  2.  Definite  fine  is  always  expressed  by  the  Ablative  (see 
Def.  Price,  37-1)  with  damnare.,  multare,  etc. 

Ex. — Damnari  decem  milibus:  to  be  fined  ten  thousand  (ses- 
terces). 

NOTE  3.  Observe  the  expression  nomen  deferre  de  -j-  Ablative: 
to  impeach,  to  indict. 

Ex. — Nomen  mei  amici  de  ambitu  detulit :  he  impeached  my 
friend  (note  translation)  for  bribery. 

The  Genitive  is  best  translated  as  subject  or  object. 

60.  Destination  or  enforced  labor  is  expressed  by  damnare, 
etc.,  with  ad  or  in  and  the  Accusative. 

Ex. — Ad  bestias  damnari :  to  be  condemned  to  the  beasts. 
Ad  (in)  metalla  damnari :  to  be  sentenced  to  the  mines. 
Extremum  ad  supplicium  :   to  extreme  punishment. 
Ad  mortem :   to  death.    Ad  opus :   to  labor. 

61.  With  the  verbs  to  arraign,  to  convict,  as  arguere,  insim- 
ulare,  convincere,  etc.,  the  charge  or  offence  may  be  stated  by  the 
Infinitive. 

Ex. — Occidisse  patrem  Sex.  Eoscius  arguitur:  Sex.  Roscius 
is  charged  with  having  killed  his  father. 

Insimulaverunt  eum  dixisse:  they  arraigned  him  for  having 
said,  etc. 

The  Genitive  with  Verbs  of  Emotion. 

62.  The  Objective  Genitive  occurs  with  the  following  verbs  of 
feeling:   Misereor  (I  pity);    also  the  impersonate  paenitet   (it 


32  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

repents),  pudet  (it  makes  ashamed),  piget  (it  disgusts,  grieves, 
etc.),  miseret  (it  moves  to  pity),  taedet  (it  wearies,  disgusts), 
pertaesum  est  (=taedet). 

In  case  of  these  impersonals,  the  person  who  feels  is  put  in  the 
Accusative,  while  the  person  or  thing  toward  which  the  feeling 
is  directed,  i.  e.f  the  object  of  feeling,  is  put  in  the  Genitive. 

Ex.— Miseremini  sociorum :  pity  your  allies. 

Neque  me  tui  neque  tuorum  liberum  misereri  potest:  I  can 
pity  neither  you  nor  your  children. 

Sua3  quemque  fortunae  pasnitet:  every  man  is  discontented 
with  his  own  lot. 

Neque  te  mei  miseret :   and  you  do  not  pity  me. 

Eum  pasnitet  negligentiae :  he  repents  of  his  negligence. 

Nos  piguit  stultitiae :  we  were  grieved  on  account  of  our  folly. 

Eos  vitas  taedet :  they  are  weary  of  life. 

Again,  the  object  of  feeling  may  be  expressed  by  the  Infinitive, 
by  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive,  by  a  clause  beginning  with 
quod.,  cum.,  or  si,  or  by  an  indirect  question. 

Ex. — Quintum  pasnitet  tuum  animum  offendisse,  or  Quintum 
pienitet  quod  tuum  animum  offendit  (offenderit)  :  Quintus  is 
sorry  (regrets)  that  he  has  wounded  your  feelings. 

Pudebat  Macedones  tarn  praBclaram  urbem  a  commissabundo 
rege  deletam  esse :  the  Macedonians  were  mortified  that  so  splen- 
did a  city  had  been  (=should  have  been)  destroyed  by  the  king 
carousing. 

Te,  quantum  proficias,  non  psenitebit :  you  will  not  be  dissatis- 
fied with  how  much  you  are  accomplishing. 

Eem. — Pudet  with  Genitive  also  means  "it  is  a  shame  before, 
in  the  sight  of." 

Ex. — Pudet  deorum  hominumque :  it  is  a  shame  in  the  sight  of 
gods  and  men. 

Interest  and  Refert. 

63.  The  impersonal  verbs  interest  and  refert  (it  concerns, 
it  is  of  importance,  etc.)  take  the  Subjective  Genitive  of  the  per- 
son or  thing  concerned. 

Ex. — Consulis  interest :  it  concerns  the  consul. 

Communis  salutis  intererat:  it  concerned  the  common  wel- 
fare. 

1.  If  the  person  interested  is  expressed  by  a  personal  pronoun, 


HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES.  33 

then  the  Genitive  is  not  used,  but  the  Ablative  singular  feminine 
of  the  possessive  adjective,  viz.,  mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  and  vestra. 

Again,  when  an  appositive  occurs,  then  instead  of  a.  noun  in 
the  Genitive,  limiting  the  Genitive  involved  in  the  possessive,  use 
the  relative  with  a  finite  verb. 

However,  it  is  quite  proper  to  use  the  forms  unius,  solius  and 
ipsius. 

Ex. — Mea  unius  (solius)  interest:  it  is  of  importance  to  me 
alone. 

Tua,  qui  es  consul,  intererit :  it  will  be  of  importance  to  you 
the  consul. 

2.  Degree  of  concern  is  expressed  (1)  by  the  adverbial  Accusa- 
tive, as  multum,  plus,  plurimum,  nihil,  quid,  tantum,  etc.,  (2) 
by  a  Genitive  of  value  (37-2),  as  magni,  permagni,  parvi,  pluris, 
quanti,  etc.,  (3)  by  an  adverb,  as  valde,  magis,  maxime,  minime, 
magnopere,  etc. 

Ex. — Vos,  quorum  minime  interest:  you,  to  whom  it  makes 
very  little  difference. 

Quid  nostra  ref ert  ?  what  difference  does  it  make  to  us  ? 

Nihil  refert :   it  matters  nothing. 

Magni  (multum,  magnopere)  interest:  it  makes  a  great  dif- 
ference. 

3.  The  object  of  concern  is  expressed  by  the  Infinitive,  the  Ac- 
cusative and  Infinitive,  ut  or  ne  with  Subjunctive,  or  by  an  in- 
direct question. 

Ex. — Vestra  maxime  interest  scire:  it  is  of  the  greatest  im- 
portance to  you  to  know. 

Docet  quantopere  reipublicae  communisque  salutis  intersit, 
manus  hostium  distineri :  he  explains  how  much  it  concerns  the 
state  and  the  common  welfare,  for  the  bands  of  the  enemy  to 
be  kept  apart. 

Utriusque  nostrum  magni  interest  ut  te  videam :  it  is  of  great 
importance  to  both  of  us  that  I  (should)  see  you. 

Quid  illius  interest,  ubi  sis  ?  What  difference  does  it  ma.ke  to 
him  where  you  are  ? 

Nihil  nostra  interest  credas  necne:  it  makes  no  difference  to 
us  whether  you  believe  or  not. 

4.  The  object  with  reference  to  which,  with  a  view  to  which, 
is  expressed  by  ad  and  the  Accusative. 


34  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Ex. — Magni  ad  honorem  nostrum  interest  quam  primum  ad 
urbem  me  venire:  it  is  of  great  importance  with  a  view  to 
(touching)  our  honor  that  I  come  to  the  city  as  soon  as  possible. 

NOTE. — Interest  and  refert  may  have  hoc,  id,  iHud,  or  quod  as 
a  subject,  and  are  personal  only  to  this  extent. 

64.  The  Objective  Genitive  with  Adjectives. 

1.  With  participial  adjectives  in  -ax  (not  Ciceronian),  -ans, 
and  -ens,  such  as  amans,  appetens,  cupiens,  diligens,  efficiens,  pa- 
tiens, sitiens,  insolens,  sciens,  egens,  indigens,  perferens,  tolerans, 
observans,  persequens,  retinens,  metuens,  capax,  rapax,  tenax, 
fugax,  etc. 

Ex. — Amans  tui :  fond  of  you.  Appetens  gloriae :  greedy  for 
glory.  Diligens  officii :  careful  of  duty.  Fugiens  laboris :  averse 
to  labor.  Negligens  amicorum:  neglectful  of  friends.  Impru- 
dens  legis :  ignorant  of  law.  Sitiens  glorise :  thirsting  for  re- 
nown. Amnis  navium  patiens :  a  river  allowing  ships,  or  a  navi- 
gable river.  Perferens  (patiens)  injuriarum:  enduring  (of) 
wrongs.  Impatiens  f  rigoris :  incapable  of  enduring  cold. 

2.  Besides  and  including  those  above  are  adjectives  denoting 
desire,  knowledge,  experience,  skill,  memory,  power,  possession, 
participation,  innocence,  fullness,  plenty,  etc.,  such  as  avidus, 
cupidus,  studiosus,  conscius,  inscius,  gnarus,  ignarus,  prudens, 
imprudens,   providus,   peritus,    imperitus,    insuetus,    consultus, 
rudis,  memor,  immemor,  compos,  potens,  affinis,  ex^ers,  consors, 
particeps,  inanis,  inops,  fertilis,  plenus,  refertus,  etc. 

Ex. — Peritus  legis,  belli :  skilled  in  law,  war.  Studiosus  nos- 
tri :  fond  of  us.  Providus  rerum  f uturarum :  heedful  of  the 
future.  Ignarus  (inscius)  omnium  rerum:  ignorant  of  every- 
thing. Particeps  consilii  (criminis)  :  sharing  (a  sharer)  in  the 
plan  (crime).  Compos  mentis  (animi)  :  in  possession  of  one's 
mind.  Beneficiorum  immemor:  unmindful  of  benefits.  Ea- 
tionis  expers:  devoid  of  reason.  Fertilis  frugum:  productive 
of  grain. 

Bern. — Many  of  the  adjectives  named  and  many  of  kindred 
meaning  allow  the  Ablative,  the  Ablative  with  in,  de,  etc.,  or  the 
Accusative  with  ad,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  adjective  and 
the  sense  intended. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  35 

Ex. — Villa  ornamentis  referta  (plena)  :  a  villa  filled  with  or- 
naments. 

In  iure  civili  rudis :   inexperienced  in  civil  law. 

In  omnibus  rebus  diligens :   diligent  in  all  things. 

Ad  prospicienda  cavendaque  pericula  peritus :  skillful  to  f orsee 
and  avoid  dangers. 

Questions. 

65.  Questions  are  direct  and  indirect  (independent  and  de- 
pendent), simple  and  compound. 

Direct  and  indirect  questions  are  introduced  by  the  same 
particles. 

A  simple  direct  question,  when  it  has  no  "other  interrogative 
word,  is  generally  introduced  by  -ne,  num,  or  nonne. 

-Ne  is  attached  to  the  emphatic  word,  which  is  usually  placed 
first  in  the  sentence.  It  should  never  be  attached  to  a  preposition. 

The  question  is  one  of  information. 

Ex. — Potesne  mihi  iter  ducis  monstrare  ?  can  you  show  me  the 
general's  route? 

Estne  verum  ?  is  it  true  ? 

Num  expects  the  answer,  No. 

Ex. — Num  negare  audes  ?  Do  you  dare  to  deny  it  ? 

Num  me  fefellit  dies?  did  the  day  deceive  me? 

Nonne  expects  the  answer  Yes. 

Ex. — Nonne  meministi  me  in  senatu  dicere,  etc.  ?  do  you  not 
remember  that  I  said  in  the  senate,  etc.  ? 

Nonne  animadvertis  ?  do  you  not  perceive  ? 

Kern.  1.  The  -ne  here  is  the  enclitic  given  above,  and  may  be 
attached  to  another  negative,  as  nemo,  nihil,  nullus,  etc. 

Ex. — Nunquamne  audivisti?   have  you  never  heard? 

Rem.  2.  Nonne  is  rarely  continued ;  the  negative  is  carried  on 
by  non. 

Rem.  3.  A  simple  direct  question  sometimes  has  no  interroga- 
tive sign.  Such  questions  are  generally  passionate,  expressing 
astonishment,  blame,  or  disgust. 

Ex. — Vivit?  immo  vero  etiam  in  senatum  venit:  he  lives? 
yea,  more,  he  even  comes  into  the  senate. 

Non  vident  ?  they  do  not  see  ? 

Infelix  est  Fabricius  quod  rus  suum  fodit?  Fabricius  is  un- 
happy because  he  digs  his  own  field  ? 


36  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Compound  Questions. 

66.  The  translation  is  "whether— or/'  but  the  "whether"  is 
not  translated  in  the  direct  form. 
Direct. — Did  he  go  or  stay  ? 
Indirect. — Tell  me  whether  he  went  or  stayed  ? 

DIRECT. 
"(whether) or" 


Utrum an> 

-   common. 
— ne an) 

Utrum anne 

Utrumne an)         not 

Utrum  —  ne anj"  common. 

INDIRECT. 
whether    .    .    ....    .    .or" 

Utrum an) 

-ne an}   Common. 

Utrum anne 

Utrumne an)         not 

Utrum  —  ne an|  common. 

— ne  .    . ne  (rare). 


First  particle  often    omitted. 

-  ...   an  (common. ) 

-  ...   anne. 

-  ...   — ne  (rare). 


an  (common.) 


anne. 


.    .   .   — ne  (rare.) 

NOTE. — Members  may  be  added  by  repetition  of  an. 

Ex. — Postrema  syllaba  utmm  brevis  est  an  longa?  postrema 
syllaba  brevisne  est  an  longa?  postrema  syllaba  brevis  est  an 
'longa? — is  the  last  syllable  long  or  short? 

Magna  fuit  contentio,  utrum  moenibus  se  defenderent  an  ob- 
viam  irent  hostibus;  or  mcenibusne  se  defenderent  an  obviam 
irent  hostibus ;  or  mcenibus  se  defenderent  an  obviam  irent  hos- 
tibus :  there  was  a  great  dispute  as  to  whether  they  should  pro- 
tect themselves  in  the  fortifications  or  go  to  meet  the  enemy. 

67.  A.n  sometimes  introduces  the  second  member  of  a  com- 
pound question,  the  first  member  of  which  is  not  expressed.    An 
is  then  translated  "or  then,"  "or  indeed,"  "or  rather,"  "or  per- 
haps." 

Ex. — An  invidiam  posteritatis  times  ?  or  then  do  you  fear  the 
odium  of  posterity  ?  or  you  fear  the  odium  of  posterity  perhaps  ? 

68.  Another  form — "whether,  or  not." 
Direct. — Will  you  go  or  not  ? 

Indirect. — Tell  me  whether  you  will  go  or  not. 


Utrum annon  (necne) 

— ne annon  (necne) 


First  particle  often  omitted. 

-    ....    annon  (necne). 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  37 

NOTE. — Annon  is  more  common  in  the  direct,  necne  in  the 
indirect  form. 

Ex. — Isne  est,  quern  quasro,  annon  ?  is  that  the  man  I  am  look- 
ing for  or  not  ? 

Die  mini  utrum  Komse  eo  die  futurus  sis  necne:  tell  me 
whether  you  will  be  at  Rome  on  that  day  or  not. 

69.  In  every  indirect  or  dependent  question  the  mood  is  the 
Subjunctive. 

Ex. — Die  mihi  quando  venturus  sis :  tell  me  when  you  will 
come. 

Maud  scio  an,  Nescio  an,  Etc. 

70.  Note  the  use  of  an  with  the  Subjunctive  after  hand  scio, 
nescio  (I  do  not  know),  dubito  (I  doubt),  incertum  est  (it  is 
uncertain),  etc. 

Hand  scio,  etc.,  an  implies  a  modest  affirmation,  and  may  be 
rendered,  "I  do  not  know  but  that,"  "I  am  inclined  to  think 
that,"  or  "perhaps/'  When  a  negative  (non,  nemo,  nihil,  nullus, 
nunquam,  etc. )  is  added,  a  mild  negative  is  expressed.  Thus,  "I 
do  not  know  but  that  not,"  "I  am  inclined  to  think  that  not,"  or 
"perhaps  not." 

Ex. — Haud  scio  (nescio,  etc.)  an  hoc  viderim:  I  am  inclined 
to  think  that  (^perhaps)  I  have  seen  this. 

Hand  scio  an  hoc  nunquam  viderim:  perhaps  (=it  may  be 
that)  I  have  never  seen  this. 

Haud  scio  an  ita  sit :   perhaps  it  is  so. 

Mea  quidem  sententia  haud  scio  an  nulla  (senectus)  beatior 
esse  possit :  for  my  own  part  I  am  inclined  to  think  that  no  old 
age  can  be  happier. 

Rem.  1.  Note  also  another  expression,  common  in  English,  but 
seldom  occurring  in  good  Latin. 

Ex. — Qua  quidem  haud  scio  an,  excepta  sapientia,  quidquam 
melius  homini  sit  a  dis  immortalibus  datum:  than  which,  in- 
deed, wisdom  excepted,  I  do  not  know  whether  anything  better 
has  been  given  to  man  by  the  immortal  gods  (^perhaps  nothing, 
etc.). 

Rem.  2.  Nescio  quis,  etc.  (nescio  qui,  etc.)  are  often  used  indef- 
initely in  the  sense  of  aliquis,  etc.  (aliqui,  etc.),  and  do  not  affect 
the  verb. 


38  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Ex. — JSTescio  quid  accidit :  something,  I  do  not  know  what,  has 
happened. 

Nescio  quo  modo  (pacto)  :  somehow;  in  some  way,  I  do  not 
know  how. 

Rem.  3.  In  case  of  the  above  verbs,  hand  scio,  etc.,  when  there  is 
a  real  doubt,  with  no  inclination  to  either  side,  then  write  accord- 
ing to  rules  for  the  indirect  question. 

The  Rhetorical  Question. 

71.  The  Rhetorical  Question  is  a  statement  in  the  form  of  a 
question.  No  answer  is  expected,  but  the  answer  implied  is  op- 
posite to  the  matter  or  substance  of  the  question. 

Surprise  is  often  expressed  by  this  form. 

The  mood  is  the  Indicative  or  Subjunctive,  according  as  the 
language  is  positive  or  softened.  (See  101.) 

This  question  makes  a  statement,  hence  in  0.  0.  it  is  expressed 
by  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  along  with  other  leading 
facts. 

Ex. — Quis  tarn  caecus  est  ?  who  is  so  blind  ? 

Quis  hoc  credat  ?  who  would  believe  this  ? 

Nemo  id  tibi  renuntiabat  ?  no  one  reported  that  thing  to  you  ? 

Romam,  caput  orbis  terrarum,  petentibus  quicquam  adeo  as- 
perum  atque  arduum  videri,  quod  inceptum  moretur?  to  men 
making  for  Rome,  the  capital  of  the  world,  did  anything  appear 
so  hard  and  laborious  as  to  delay  the  undertaking?  (0.  0.) 


THE  INFINITIVE. 
72.  Gerund  and  Supine. 

Nom. — Laudare,  used  as  subject  or  predicate. 

Gen. — Laudandi,  as  any  other  noun. 

Dat. — Laudando,  as  any  other  noun. 

Ace. — Laudare,  used  as  object  of  verbs  volo,  cupio,  audeo,  etc. 

Ace. — Laudandum,  only  after  prepositions  ad,  inter,  in,  etc. 

Ace. — Laudatum  (supine),  after  verbs  of  motion. 

Abl. — Laudando,  expresses  cause,  means,  etc. ;  also  used  with  the 
prepositions  ab,  de,  ex,  in,  etc. 

Abl. — Laudatu  (Supine),  only  with  certain  adjectives — good, 
bad,  easy,  difficult,  worthy,  unworthy,  pleasant,  horri- 
ble, wonderful,  etc.;  also  with  fas  (right),  nefas 
(wrong),  opus  (need). 


HAXD-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  39 

73.  Rule  for  the  Attraction  of  the  Gerund. — The  Gerund  of  a 
transitive  verb  is  attracted  with  its  object.    The  Gerund  takes  the 
gender  and  number  of  the  object,  while  the  object  takes  the  case 
of  the  Gerund. 

Ex. — Suspicionis  vitandae  causa :  for  the  sake  of  avoiding  sus- 
picion. 

Eem.  1.  Neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns  are  not  attracted. 

Ex. — Haec  et  similia  dicendo:  by  saying  these  and  similar 
things. 

Excep. — The  forms  mei.,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  and  vestri  are  used  as 
if  coming  from  meum,  tuum,  suum,  etc. 

Ex. — Mei,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  vestri,  cohservandi  causa:  for  the 
sake  of  saving  myself,  yourself,  himself  (or  themselves),  our- 
selves, yourselves. 

Infinitive  Tenses — Active. 

74 .  The  Infinitive  has  all  the  tenses  of  the  Indicative,  but  not 
in  separate  forms. 

Present. — Laudare. 

Imperfect. — Laudare  (coincident  with  a  past  leading  tense). 

Perfect. — Laudavisse. 

Aorist. — Laudavisse. 

Pluperfect. — Laudavisse. 

First  Fut.  from  Pres. — Eus,  a,  um  esse;  or,  fore  (futurum  esse) 

ut  +  Present  Subjunctive. 
Second  Fut.  from  Pres. — Fore   (futurum  esse)   ut  -f    Perfect 

Subjunctive. 
First  Fut.  from  Past. — Kus,  a,  um  esse;  or,  fore  (futurum  esse) 

ut  +  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

Second  Fut.  from  Past. — Fore  ut  -f-  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 
NOTE. — Fore  and  futurum  esse  are  not  inflected. 

Examples  of  Active  Infinitive  Tenses. 

Present. — Dicit  puerum  venire :  is  coming. 
Imperfect. — Dixit  puerum  venire:   was  coming. 
Perfect. — Dicit  puerum  venisse :   has  come. 
Aorist. — Dicit  puerum  venisse :   came. 
Pluperfect. — Dixit  puerum  venisse:    had  come. 


40  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

First  Fut.  from  Pres. — Dicit  puerum  venturum  esse :  will  come. 

Dicit  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  puer  metuat :  will  fear. 
Second  Fut.  from  Pres. — Dicit  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  puer  ven- 

erit :   will  have  come. 
First   Fut.   from   Past. — Dixit  puerum  venturum  esse:   would 

come.     Dixit  fore   (futurum  esse)   ut  puer  metueret: 

would  fear. 
Second  Fut.  from  Past. — Dixit  fore  ut  venisset :    would  have 

come  (by  a  certain  time). 

NOTE. — Instead  of  heavy  circumlocutions,  the  construction 
may  often  be  varied  by  using  proper  form  of  posse  or  velle,  or  by 
some  other  turn. 

75.  Infinitive  Tenses — Passive. 

Present. — Laudari. 

Imperfect. — Laudari. 

Perfect. — Laudatus,  a,  um  esse. 

Aorist. — Laudatus,  a,,  um  esse. 

Pluperfect. — Laudatus,  a,  um  esse. 

First  Fut.  from  Pres. — Laudatum  iri;  or,  fore  (futurum  esse) 
ut  +  Present  Subjunctive  (passive). 

Second  Fut.  from  Pres. — Laudatus,  a,  um  fore;  or,  fore  (fu- 
turum esse)  ut  -f~  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

First  Fut.  from  Past. — Laudatum  iri;  or,  fore  (futurum  esse) 
ut  -}-  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

Second  Fut.  from  Past. — Laudatus,  a,  um  fore;  or,  fore  ut  + 
Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

Rem.  1.  Laudatum  is  the  supine  and  cannot  be  inflected. 
Eem.  2.  Laudatus,  a,  um  is  the  perfect  passive  participle  and 
agrees  with  its  subject. 

Examples  of  Passive  Infinitive  Tenses. 

Present. — Audio  puerum  laudari :  is  (being)  praised. 
Imperfect. — Audivi  puerum  laudari :   was  (being)  praised. 
Perfect. — Audio  puerum  laudatum  esse :   has  been  praised. 
Aorist. — Audio  puerum  laudatum  esse :  was  praised. 
Pluperfect. — Audivi  puerum  laudatum  esse :  had  been  praised. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  41 

First  Fut.  from  Pres. — Audio  pueram  laudatum  iri :    will  be 

praised. 
Or,  Audio  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  puer  laudetur:  will  be 

praised. 
Second  Fut.  from  Pres. — Audio  puerum  laudatum  fore:    will 

have  been  praised. 

Or,  Audio  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  puer  laudatus  sit. 
First  Fut.  from  Past. — Audivi  puerum  laudatum  iri :   would  be 

praised. 

Or,  Audivi  fore  (futurum  esse)  ut  puer  laudaretur. 
Second  Fut.  from  Past. — Audivi  puerum  laudatum  fore :   would 

have  been  praised  (by  a  certain  time). 
Or,   Audivi   fore  ut   laudatus   esset:   would   have   been 

praised. 

Kem.  1.  In  case  of  Second  Futures,  the  construction  may  be 
varied  by  forms  of  posse  and  velle,  or  First  Future  forms  may  be 
used. 

The  Accusative  and  the  Infinitive. 

76.  The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is  used  as  an  object 
after  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  believing,  perceiving,  hearing, 
reading,  learning,  writing,  knowing,  seeing  (verba  sentiendi  et 
declarandi)  and  equivalent  expressions. 

It  also  occurs  as  the  subject  with  many  impersonal  verbs,  as 
constat,  oportet,  necesse  est,  iuvat,  apparet,  convenit,  decet,  in- 
terest, refert,  etc. ;  with  adjective  and  substantive  predicates,  as 
verum,  facile,  apertum,  manifestum,  par,  aequum,  mos,  facinus, 
opinio,  testis,  auctor,  spes,  fas,  nefas — est. 

3.  It  occurs  parallel  with  a  quod  clause  after  verbs  of  emotion 
— rejoicing,  lamenting,  boasting,  etc. 

4.  It  occurs  with  some  verbs  of  will,  desire,  ordering  and  the 
like,  as  iubere,  vetare,  sinere,  pati,  velle,  nolle,  malle,  cupere, 
cog  ere,     (See  83-4,  Excep.) 

5.  It  occurs  in  exclamations   as  the  object  of  unexpressed 
thought  or  feeling. 

Ex. — Mene  incepto  desistere  !   I  desist  from  my  undertaking ! 

6.  It  occurs  in  apposition  with  a  substantive. 

Ex. — Hoc — Ca.tilinam  morte  multari:  this — (namely)  for 
Catiline  to  be  punished  with  death. 


42  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 


.  —  Verbs  meaning  to  swear,  to  threaten,  to  hope  and 
to  promise  take  the  Accusative  with  the  Future  Infinite. 

Ex.  —  Sperant  se  maximum  f  ructum  esse  captures  :  they  hope 
to  derive  great  advantage. 

The  English  translation  of  the  Accusative  +  Infinitive  is  reg- 
ularly introduced  by  "that." 

The  Nominative  with  the  Infinitive. 

77.  1.  The  Nominative  with  the  Infinitive  of  a  copulative  verb 
is  used  after  (=  depending  on)  verbs  meaning  to  wish,  to  be  able, 
to  begin,  to  dare,  to  be  accustomed,  to  continue,  to  cease,  ought, 
etc.,  as  volo,  cupio,  nolo,  malo,  possum,  coepi,  incipio,  audeo, 
soleo,  pergo,  desino,  deleo. 

Ex.  —  Nemo  malus  esse  felix  potest  :  no  bad  man  can  be  happy. 

^Equi  videri  volumus  :   we  desire  to  appear  just. 

Socrates  parens  philosophise  iure  dici  potest  :  Socrates  can 
justly  be  called  the  "Father  of  Philosophy." 

2.  The  Nominative  with  the  Infinitive  is  used  with  the  passives 
of  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  etc.  A  noun,  adjective,  or  parti- 
ciple in  the  predicate  referring  to  the  subject  is  written  in  the 
Nominative.  Note  also  that  the  leading  verb  is  written  person- 
ally, though  often  translated  impersonally. 

The  personal  construction  is  used  throughout  with  videor, 
iubeor,  sinor,  vetor,  prohibeor,  and  arguor. 

Generally  speaking,  dicor,  trador,  feror,  existimor,  putor,  per- 
hibeor,  etc..,  are  personal  in  the  simple  tenses  (Present,  Imperfect 
and  Future),  and  impersonal  in  the  compound  tenses.  That  is 
to  say,  in  simple  tenses  the  verb  is  written  personally  with  the 
Nominative  and  Infinitive  ;  in  compound  tenses,  it  is  written  im- 
personally with  the  Accusative  and  Infinitive. 

Thus,  instead  of  "It  seems  that  he  was,"  write  "He  seems  to 
have  been."  It  is  said  that  Cicero  was  an  eloquent  orator  : 
Cicero  is  said  to  have  been  an  eloquent  orator  =  Cicero  dicitur 
orator  eloquens  fuisse. 

Caesar  dicitur  esse  occisus  :  Ca3sar  is  said  to  have  been  killed, 
or,  it  is  said  that  Ca?sar  was  killed. 

Metellus  dicitur  esse  venturus  :  it  is  said  that  Metellus  will 
come. 

Mihi  videtur  fortis  esse  :  it  seems  to  me  that  he  is  brave  (=he 
seems  to  me  to  be  brave). 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  43 

Ut  exstincta?  potius  amicitia?  quam  oppressae  esse  videantur: 
that  friendships  may  appear  to  have  died  out  rather  than  to  have 
been  crushed  out. 

Tu  hoc  fecisse  putaris :  it  is  thought  that  you  did  this. 

The  Complementary  Infinitive. 

78,  The  Infinitive  is  directly  dependent  on  the   following 
verbs:    Velle,  nolle,  matte,  cupere,  studere  (to  be  eager,  to  de- 
sire), audere,  conari,  vereri,  timere  (to  be  afraid  to),  coepi,  in- 
cipere,  dubitare  (to  hesitate),  scire  (to  know  how  to),  nescire, 
disccre  (to  learn  how  to),  docerc  (to  teach  how  to),  solere,  posse, 
quire  (to  be  able),  nequire,  debere,  recusare  (to  refuse,  see  89- 
R.  2),  horrere  (to  be  afraid),  desinere  (to  cease),  pergere  (to 
continue,  proceed  to),  perseverare  (to  continue  steadily,  to  per- 
sist in,  to  persevere  in  doing,  etc.),  contendere  (to  hasten),  pro- 
perafe,  fesiinare,  maturare,  animum  (or,  in  animum}  inducere 
(to  decide,  to  determine),  parare  (to  get  ready  to),  statuere  (to 
resolve),  dediscere  (to  forget  how  to),  oblimsci  (to  forget  to), 
and  others  not  so  common. 

XOTE  1.  Observe  especially  the  adjective  paratus  (ready)  with 
the  Infinitive. 

XOTE  2.  With  a  passive  Infinitive  the  forms  coeptus,  a,  urn 
sum,  etc.,  and  de  situs,  a,  um  sum,  etc.,  should  be  used  rather  than 
coepi  and  desii,  etc. 

Ex. — Veteres  orationes  a  plerisque  legi  desitse  sunt :  the  old 
speeches  have  ceased  to  be  read  by  most  people. 

Bello  Athenienses  undique  premi  sunt  coepti:  the  Athenians 
began  to  be  pressed  by  war  on  all  sides. 

Subjunctive  Tenses. 

79.  The  Subjunctive,  like  the  Infinitive,  embraces  all  the 
tenses  of  the  Indicative,  but  not  in  separate  forms. 

The  Present  Subjunctive  form  embraces  two  tenses — the  Pres- 
ent, and  First  Future  from  the  Present. 

The  Perfect  Subjunctive  form  embraces  three  tenses — the  Per- 
fect, Aorist,  and  Second  Future  from  the  Present. 

The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  form  embraces  two  tenses — the 
Imperfect,  and  First  Future  from  the  Past. 

The  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  form  embraces  two  tenses — the 
Pluperfect,  and  Second  Future  from  the  Past. 


44  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

80.  Future  Tenses  of  the  Subjunctive. 

First  Future  from,  Present. — Present  Subjunctive  form.  But 
when  the  future  time  is  not  plainly  shown  by  the  context,  use 
rusf  a,  urn  sim,  etc.  If  the  verb  is  passive  or  Jias  no  Future  Ac- 
tive Participle,,  then  use  futurum  sit  ut  +  Present  Subjunctive. 

Second  Future  from  Present. — Perfect  Subjunctive  form.  But 
when  the  future  time  is  not  plainly  shown  by  the  context,  use 
futurum  sit  ut  +  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

First  Future  'from  Past. — Imperfect  Subjunctive  form.  But 
when  the  future  time  is  not  plainly  shown  by  the  context,  use 
rus,  a,  urn  essem,  etc.  If  the  verb  is  passive  or  has  no  Future 
Active  Participle,  then  use  futurum  esset  ut  +  Imperfect  Sub- 
junctive. 

Second  Future  from  Postf.— Pluperfect  Subjunctive  form.  But 
when  the  future  time  is  not  plainly  shown  by  the  context;  then 
use  futurum  esset  ut  +  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

Bern.  1.  Futurum  sit  and  futurum  esset  in  these  cases  are  im- 
personal, and  therefore  cannot  be  inflected. 

Rem.  2.  The  Future  Active  Participle  cannot  be  used  here  to 
express  a  Second  Future. 

CAUTION. — Never  use  -rus,  a,  um  sim.,  essem,  etc.,  in  a  sen- 
tence of  Design  or  Result,  nor  after  a  verb  or  expression  of  fear, 
danger,  anxiety,  or  apprehension. 

The  -rus  form  is  usual  in  indirect  questions,  causal  and  rela- 
tive sentences,  and  sentences  with  quin. 

Examples  of  Subjunctive  tenses : 

Present. — Die  mihi  quid  facias :   tell  me  what  you  are  doing. 
Perfect. — Die  mihi  quid  feceris :  tell  me  what  you  have  done. 
Aorist. — Die  mihi  quid  feceris :   tell  me  what  you  did. 
Imperfect. — Mihi  dixit  quid  faeeres :   he  told  me  what  you  were 

doing. 
Pluperfect. — Mihi  dixit  quid  fecisses :   he  told  me  what  you  had 

done. 

First  Fut.  from  Pres. — Dux  militibus  imperat  ut  oppidum  mun- 
iant:  the  general  orders  the  soldiers  to  fortify  (that 
they  shall  fortify)  the  town. 

Timeo  ut  amicus  veniat :   I  fear  that  my  friend  will  not 
come. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  45 

Die  mihi  quid  facturus  sis :  tell  me  what  you  will  do. 
Non  dubito  quin  futurum  sit  ut  pluat  (agatur)  :  I  do  not 

doubt  that  it  will  rain  (that  it  will  be  done) . 
Second  Fut.  from  Pres. — Nemo  dubitat  quin,  si  Helvetios  super- 

averint  Komani,  yEduis  libertatem  sint  erepturi:    no 

one  doubts  that,  if  the  Komans  conquer  (=shall  have 

conquered)  the  Helvetians,,  they  will  take  away  from 

the  vEduans  their  freedom. 
Omnes  credunt,  nisi  hoc  factum  sit,  rempublicam  in  peri- 

culo  futuram  esse:   all  believe  that,  unless  this  is  done 

(=if  this  shall  not  have  been  done),  the  state  will  be 

in  danger. 
Hac  mente  laborem  sese  ferre,  senes  ut  in  otia  tuta  re- 

ceclant,  aiunt,  cum  sibi  sint  congesta  cibaria:  they  say 

that  they  endure  labor  with  this  intention,  to  retire 

in  their  old  age  into  rest  secure,  when  provision  has 

been  (=shall  have  been)  collected  by  them. 
Promittit  se  nobis,  quod  comparare  potuerit,  daturum 

esse:    he  promises  to  give  us  whatever  he  can  (shall 

have  been  able  to)  obtain. 
Nescio  num  futurum  sit  ut  redierit :    I   do  not  know 

whether  he  will  have  returned. 
First  Fut.  from  Past. — Dux   militibus   imperavit   ut    oppidum 

munirent :   the  general  ordered  the  soldiers  to  fortify 

the  town. 
Timebam  ut  amicus  veniret :  I  was  afraid  that  my  friend 

would  not  come. 
Mihi  dixit  quid  facturus  esses :    he  told  me  what  you 

would  do. 
Non  dubitabam  quin  futurum  esset  ut  plueret   (agere- 

tur)  :    I  did  not  doubt  that  it  would  rain  (would  be 

done). 
Second  Fut.  from  Past. — Dux  militibus  praemia  promisit  qui  im- 

petum  sustinuissent :   the  general  promised  rewards  to 

the  soldiers  that  should  (=should  have)   sustain (ed) 

the  attack. 
Ad  haec  Ca?sar  respondit  se  civitatem  conservaturum  esse 

si,  priusquam  murum  aries  attigisset,  se  dedidissent :  to 

these  things  (=to  this)  Caesar  replied  that  he  would 


46  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

save  their  state  if  they  should  surrender  (=  should  have 
surrendered)  before  the  battering-ram  touched  the  wall. 

Nos  omnes  timebamus  ne,  cum  satis  copiarum  collegisset, 
Italiae  bellum  inferret :  all  of  us  were  afraid  that,  when 
he  should  collect  sufficient  forces,  he  would  make  war 
upon  Italy. 

Nesciebam  num  futurum  esset  ut  redisset :  I  did  not  know 
whether  he  would  have  returned  (by  a  certain  time). 

81.  It  must  be  noted  that  a  Subjunctive  or  Infinitive  tense 
may  be  future  with  reference  to,  or  measuring  from  another 
future  tense. 

Ex. — Donabitur  ergo  ne  pereat :  it  will  be  presented  therefore 
lest  he  perish. 

Tuus  amicus  dicet  se  venturum  esse :  your  friend  will  say  that 
he  will  come. 

Puerum  rogabo  num  iturus  sit :  I  shall  ask  the  boy  whether  he 
will  go. 

Final  Sentences  of  Design  or  Purpose. 

82.  1-  Sentences  of  Design  or  Purpose  are  most  frequently  in- 
troduced by  ut  or  ne.     (See  summary  given  in  83.)    The  mood 
is  the  Subjunctive.     The  tenses  are  the  Present  and  Imperfect 
(almost  invariably.) 

2.  The  ut  of  Purpose  is  translated  in  order  that,  in  order  to,  to 
or  that.    The  negative  ne  is  translated  in  order  that  not,  in  order 
not  to.,  not  to,  that  not,  or  lest. 

Bern.  1.  Uti  is  often  used  instead  of  ut,  and  ut  ne  instead  of  ne. 

3.  The  Final  Sentence  of  Design  is  of  two  kinds : 

(1)  The  Pure  Final  Sentence  of  Design,  in  which  the  design  is 
brought  out  by  the  particle. 

Ex.— ^-Edimus  ut  vivamus :  we  eat  in  order  to  live. 

(2)  The  Complementary  Final  Sentence  of  Design,  in  which 
the  desire  or  purpose  lies  in  the  leading  verb  (verba  studii  et  vol- 
untatis),  and  the  clause  with  ut  or  ne  follows  as  a  complement. 
Here  ut=to,  or  that;  ne=not  to,  that  not. 

Ex. — Phaethon  optavit  ut  in  currum  patris  tolleretur:    Phse- 
thon  desired  to  be  lifted  up  into  his  father's  chariot. 

4.  Verbs  meaning  to  will,  to  wish,  to  order,  to  induce,  to  impel, 
to  urge,  to  beg,  to  persuade,  to  warn,  to  advise,  to  decree,  to  per- 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  47 

mit,  to  strive,  to  take  care,  with  substantives  and  phrases  imply- 
ing these  meanings,  as  orare,  rogare,  petere,  postulare,  imperare, 
praecipere,  hortari,  persuadere,  monere,  adducere,  optare,  niti, 
operam  dare,  negotium  dare,  consilium,  mandatum,  lex,  praecep- 
tum,  etc.,  are  followed  by  the  Complementary  Final  ut  or  ne  of 
Purpose  or  Design. 

Examples  of  Final  Sentences. — Scribam  aperte  ne  ignores :  I 
will  write  plainly  in  order  that  you  may  not  be  ignorant. 

Cura  ut  valeas :  take  care  to  keep  well. 

Nondum  adducor  ut  hoc  f  aciam :  I  am  not  yet  induced  to  do 
this. 

Abs  te  peto  ut  ad  me  quam  primum  venias :  I  beg  you  to  come 
to  me  as  soon  as  possible. 

Non  est  postulandum  ut  legum  pcenas  pertimescas :  it  is  not  to 
be  demanded  (expected)  that  you  should  dread  the  punishments 
of  the  laws. 

Decrevit  quondam  senatus  ut  L.  Opimius  consul  videret  ne 
quid  respublica  detriment!  caperet :  the  senate  formerly  decreed 
that  L.  Opimius  the  consul  should  see  to  it  that  the  state  received 
no  (nothing  of)  harm. 

Excep. — Inhere  (to  order),  vetare  (to  forbid),  sinere  (to  al- 
low), and  pati  (to  suffer,  to  allow)  take  the  Accusative  with  the 
Infinitive.  Concedere  (to  grant)  and  permittere  (to  permit) 
take  either  the  Dative  with  the  Infinitive  or  the  Dative  with  ut 
and  the  Subjunctive.  Imperare  (to  order)  takes  the  Accusative 
with  the  passive  (or  deponent)  Infinitive,  otherwise  ut  +  Sub- 
junctive. 

Other  exceptions  cannot  be  given  here. 

Bern. — Ut  is  occasionally  omitted. 

Ex. — Ab  eis  censeo  petatis  qui  ista  profitentur:  I  advise  you 
to  ask  those  who  profess  such  things. 

Velim  ad  me  scribas :  I  should  like  you  to  write  to  me.  (Very 
common  with  velim.) 

5.  In  a  sentence  (clause)  of  purpose  containing  a  comparative 
adjective  or  adverb,  quo  is  more  common  than  ut. 

Ex. — Legem  brevem  esse  oportet  quo  facilius  ab  imperitis 
teneatur :  a  law  ought  to  be  brief  that  it  may  the  more  easily  be 
grasped  by  the  uneducated. 

6.  A  transfer  from  the  positive  to  the  negative  in  the  same 
sentence  may  be  made,  or  the  negative  may  be  continued  by  intro- 


48  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

ducing  the  new  clause  with  neve  (neu),  or  neque  (nee) ;  thus,  ut 
— neve  (neu)  or  neque  (nec),ne — neve  (neu)  or  neque  (nee). 

Ex. — Cohortatus  est  uti  suae  pristinas  virtutis  memoriam  retin- 
erent,  neu  perturbarentur  animo:  he  urged  them  to  retain  the 
remembrance  of  their  former  valor,  and  not  to  be  disturbed  in 
mind. 

7.  Ne  is  followed  by  a  positive  pronoun,  adjective,  or  adverb. 

Ne  quis :   in  order  that  no  one. 

Ne  quid :   in  order  that  nothing. 

Ne  qui,  ne  ullus :  in  order  that  no  (adjective) . 

Ne  unquam,  ne  quando :    in  order  that  never. 

Ne  usquam :  in  order  that  nowhere. 

Summary  of  Purpose  Constructions. 

83.    1.  Ut  or  ne  with  the  Subjunctive. 

2.  The  relative  pronoun  (also  dum,  donee,  antequam,  prius- 
quam,  and  other  relative  words)  with  the  Subjunctive. 

3.  Ad  with  the  Gerund. 

4.  Supine  in  -um  with  verbs  of  motion. 

5.  Causa  or  gratia  following  the  Genitive  of  the  Gerund. 
9.  Simple  Infinitive. 


Future  Active  Participle. 
Dative  of  Gerund. 


Not  in  good  use. 


6.  Genitive  of  Gerund  (rare) 

10.  Present  Participle  (approximately). 

11.  Future  Passive  Participle  (with  restrictions.     See  140.) 
Ex. — 1.  Examples  of  ut  and  ne  have  been  given  82). 

2.  Clusini  legates  Eomam,  qui  auxilium  peterent,  miserunt: 
the  inhabitants  of  Clusium  sent  ambassadors  to  Eome,  to  ask  for 
assistance. 

Senex  serit  arbores  quae  alteri  saeculo  prosint :  the  old  man  sets 
out  trees,  to  do  good  to  (in  order  that  they  may  profit)  the  next 
generation. 

Ne  exspectemus  dum  rogemur:  let  us  not  wait  until  we  are 
asked. 

Hserens  in  tergo  Eomanus,  priusquam  fores  portarum  ob- 
icerentur,  velut  agmine  uno  inrumpit:  the  Eoman  clinging  to 
their  rear  rushed  in,  in  one  and  the  same  line  as  it  were,  before 
the  doors  of  the  gate  were  (=could  be)  shut. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  49 

3.  Legati  in  Hispaniam  missi  sunt  ad  res  sociorum  inspicien- 
das :  ambassadors  were  sent  to  Spain  for  the  purpose  of  looking 
into  the  affairs  of  the  allies. 

4.  Aquam  forte  ea  sacris  extra  moenia  petitum  ierat :   she  had 
gone  outside  the  walls  by  chance  to  get  water  for  the  sacrifices. 
Mula  pastum  est  missa:   the  mule  was  turned  out  to  graze. 

5.  Multi  principes  Roma,  non  tarn  sui  conservandi  quam  tu- 
orum   consiliorum   reprimendorum   causa   profugerunt:     many 
leading  men  fled  from  Rome,  not  so  much  for  the  sake  of  saving 
themselves  as  for  the  sake  of  checking  your  plans  (as  they  say). 
Colloquendi  gratia :  for  the  sake  of  conversing. 

6.  Firmandae  concordia3 :   for  establishing  harmony. 

7.  Legationibus  Gallorum  audiendis  moratus :   having  tarried 
to  hear  the  embassies  of  the  Gauls. 

8.  Maroboduus  misit  legates  ad  Tiberium  oraturos  auxilia : 
Marbod  sent  envoys  to  Tiberius  to  beg  for  reinforcements. 

9.  Abiit  sedem  visere  Minervse :    she  went  away  to  visit  the 
temple  of  Minerva. 

10.  Legati  a  Segeste  venerunt  auxilium  orantes :   ambassadors 
came  from  Segestes  to  beg  for  (begging  for)  aid. 

1.1.  Attribuit  nos  trucidandos  Cethego :  he  assigns  us  to  Ceth- 
egus  to  be  butchered. 

Verbs  of  Fearing. 

84.  Verbs  and  expressions  of  fear,  danger,  anxiety,  etc.,  have 
a  peculiar  construction. 

They  take  the  Subjunctive  with  ne  (that,  lest),  and  ut  (that 
not,  lest  not) ;  but  ne  non  (that  not,  lest  not)  may  be  used  in- 
stead of  ut,  when  the  word  of  fear,  etc.,  is  associated  with  a  neg- 
ative. 

A  wish  for  or  against  underlies  and  explains  the  construction. 
Ne  shows  that  the  negative  is  wished  and  the  positive  feared ;  ut 
(ne  non)  shows  that  the  positive  is  wished  and  the  negative 
feared. 

Any  tense  of  the  Subjunctive  may  be  used. 

Ex. — Timeo  ne  veniat :  I  fear  that  he  will  come  (I  do  not  wish 
him  to  come). 

Timeo  ut  veniat:  I  fear  that  he  will  not  come  (I  wish  him  to 
come). 


50  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Non  vereor  ne  tua  virtus  opinion!  hominum  non  respondeat : 
I  am  not  afraid  that  your  virtue  will  not  answer  to  people's  ex- 
pectation. 

NOTE. — When  such  a  verb  means  "to  be  shy  of,"  "to  hesitate/' 
"to  be  afraid  of,"  it  is  construed  with  the  simple  Infinitive. 

Ex. — Vereor  aperte  dicere :   I  am  afraid  to  speak  openly. 

Nedum. 

85.  Nedum,  "not  to  speak  of/'  "not  to  mention/'  "much 
less/'  "still  less"  is  used  with  the  Subjunctive,  Present  and  Im- 
perfect tenses.    It  is  regularly  used  in  a  sentence  with  a  negative 
expressed  or  implied.    The  verb  is  frequently  omitted,  in  which 
case  nedum  may  be  rendered  "much  more." 

Ex. — Oppidum  aegre  defendere  possumus,  nedum  acie  dimicare 
possimus:  we  can  scarcely  defend  the  town,  much  less  can  we 
fight  in  open  battle. 

Final  Sentences  of  Result  (Tendency),  or  Consecutive  Sen- 
tences. 

86.  1.  Verbs  meaning  to  to  make,  to  effect,  to  cause,  to  bring 
about,  to  happen,  as  facer  e,  efficere  (make,  cause,  effect),  com- 
mittere  (cause,  give  occasion,  act  so  as — generally  stated  nega- 
tively, non  committere,  etc.) ;   fit,  accidit,  contingit,  evenit,  usu 
venit  (it  happens,  occurs) ;   restat,  reliquum  est  (it  remains)  ; 
sequitur  (it  follows)  ;  est  (it  is  the  case),  etc.,  take  ut  or  ut  non 
of  Result. 

2.  A  sentence  of  Result  also  follows  the  particles  ita,  sic,  tarn, 
~adeo  (so),  tantus  (so  great),  toties  (so  often),  is,  liic,  ille,  iste, 
talis  (such),  eiusmodi  (of  such  a  kind),  etc. 

3.  The  mood  is  the  Subjunctive.    The  Present  and  Imperfect 
-tenses  are  most  common,  but  the  Perfect,  Aorist,  and  Pluperfect 
are  used  when  the  sense  calls  for  them. 

4.  The  ut  of  Result  is  translated  so  that,  so  as  to,  as  to,  or  that. 
The  negative  is  ut  non,  translated  so  that  not,  so  as  not  to,  as  not 
to,  or  that  not. 

Ex. — Fecerunt  ut  consimilis  fugse  profectio  videretur:  they 
caused  that  their  departure  seemed  (they  caused  their  depar- 
ture to  appear)  very  like  flight. 

His  rebus  fiebat  ut  minus  facile  finitimis  bellum  inferre  pos- 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  51 

sent :  on  account  of  these  things  it  happened  that  they  could 
make  war  upon  their  neighbors  less  easily. 

Fieri  potest  ut  fallar:  it  may  be  (is  possible)  that  I  am  mis- 
taken, or  I  may  be  mistaken. 

lam  res  Eomana  adeo  erat  valida  ut  cuilibet  fmitimarum  civ- 
itatum  bello  par  esset:  the  power  of  Home  was  now  so  strong 
that  she  was  equal  in  war  to  any  one  of  the  neighboring  states. 

Conncior  lacrimis  sic  ut  ferre  non  possim:  I  am  so  overcome 
with  tears  that  I  cannot  endure  it. 

Eo  insolentiag  iam  venit  ut  ne  amici  quidem  eum  defendant : 
he  has  now  come  to  such  a  (=that)  pitch  of  insolence  that  not 
even  his  friends  defend  him. 

Eem.  1.  A  sentence  of  Design  may  follow  some  of  the  above- 
named  verbs  and  particles.  It  depends  altogether  on  whether 
there  is  a  definite  purpose  or  a  natural  consequence. 

5.  A  transfer  may  be  made  from  positive  to  negative,  or  a  neg- 
ative may  be  continued,  by  introducing  the  new  clause  with  neque 
(nee)',  thus,  ut — neque  (nee),  ut  non — neque  (nee). 

Ex. — Sed  tanta  moderatio  fuit  hominis  ut  contineret  dolorem, 
neque  se  ulcisceretur :  but  such  was  the  moderation  of  the  man 
that  he  controlled  his  pain,  and  did  not  avenge  himself. 

6.  The  ut  of  Result  is  followed  by  a  negative  pronoun,  ad- 
jective, or  adverb. 

Ut  nemo :  so  that  no  one. 
Ut  nihi] :   so  that  nothing. 
Utnullus:   so  that  no  (adjective). 
Ut  nunquam :   so  that  never. 
Ut  nusquam:    so  that  nowhere. 

Rem.  2.  Ut  non  may  be  replaced  by  quin  after  a  negative,  ex- 
pressed or  implied. 

Ex. — Nil  tarn  difficile  est  quin  quaerendo  investigari  possit : 
nothing  is  so  difficult  that  it  cannot  be  traced  out  by  searching. 

7.  Consecutive  sentences  are  often  introduced  by  the  Relative. 
Ex. — Ad  id  pastores  quoque  accesserant  qui  omnes  facile  spem 

f  acerent :  to  that  the  shepherds  also  had  agreed  so  that  they  all 
easily  caused  hope,  etc. 

Qua?  enim  domus  tarn  stabilis,  qua?  tarn  firma  civitas  est,  quae 
non  odiis  et  discidiis  funditus  possit  everti?  for  what  house  is  so 


52  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

firm.,  what  state  is  so  strong  that  it  cannot  be  utterly  overthrown 
by  hate  and  dissension  ? 

Especially  after  indefinite,  or  negative  expressions.  (See  88 
and  foil. ) 

Ex. — Stint  qui  dicant:  there  are  some  to  (that)  say. 

Multi  sunt  qui  putent :  there  are  many  that  think. 

Nemo  est  qui :  there  is  no  one  to  (that) .  Nihil  est  quod :  there 
is  nothing  to  (that).  Quis  est  qui:  who  is  there  that  (to)? 
Quid  est  quod:  what  is  there  that  (to)  ? 

8.  After  a  comparative  quam  ut  or  quam  qui  is  used.  Cicero 
uses  quam  ut. 

Maior  sum  quam  cui  possit  f ortuna  nocere :  I  am  too  great  for 
fortune  to  be  able  to  hurt  me. 

Clarior  res  erat  quam  ut  tegi  posset :  the  thing  was  too  clear  to 
be  (able  to  be)  covered  up. 

Quod  praeceptum  (nosce  te  ipsum),  quia  maius  erat  quam  ut 
ab  homine  videretur,  idcirco  adsignatum  est  deo:  this  precept 
(know  thyself),  because  it  seemed  too  great  to  be  of  man,  was 
therefore  attributed  to  a  god. 

(For  Consecutive  Sentences  see  further  under  88.) 

87.  Ut  with  the  Indicative  means  as  or  ivhen. 

Ex. — Ut  dicitur :  as  it  is  said.  Ut  supra  dixi :  as  I  have  said 
a.bove. 

Ut  vidit :  when  he  had  seen.  Ut  cecidit :  when  he  had  fallen. 
(See  144.) 

The  Consecutive  Subjunctive — CONTINUED. 

88.  I-  This  Subjunctive  occurs  with  the  "Consecutive  Rela- 
tive" after  the  verbs  esse,  hob  ere,  invenire,  nancisci.,  reperire, 
quaerere,  etc.,  positive  or  negative,  active  or  passive. 

Ex. — Sunt  qui  dicant  (putent)  :  there  are  some  to  (that)  say 
(think). 

Eeperti  sunt  duo  equites  Romani  qui  te  ista  cura  liberarent 
et — pollicerentur :  two  Roman  knights  were  found  to  relieve  you 
of  that  care  and  to  promise,  etc.  (=that  relieved — and  prom- 
ised). 

Quern  sequar,  non  habeo :   I  have  no  one  to  follow. 

Nil  habeo  quod  agam :   I  have  nothing  to  do. 

2.  The  Consecutive  Relative  occurs  also  wiihindefinite,  general, 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  53 

and  especially  negative  expressions,  rhetorical  questions,  etc.,  as 
multi,  quidam,  nonnulli,  alii,  pauci — sunt  qui;  nemo,  nullus — 
est  qui;  nihil  est  quod;  quis  est  qui?  quid  est  quod?  si  quis  est 
qui,  etc. 

Ex. — Nonnulli  sunt  qui  non  videant :  there  are  some  that  do 
not  see. 

Nemo  est  qui  te  non  metuat ;  nemo,  qui  non  oderit :  there  is 
no  one  that  does  not  fear  you ;  no  one  that  does  not  hate  you. 

Si  quis  est  qui  hoc  dicat :  if  there  is  any  one  to  say  this. 

Quid  est  quod  me  impediat?  what  is  there  to  prevent  me 
(=that  prevents  me)  ? 

3.  Consecutive  Eelative  is  used  after  dignus    (worthy),  in- 
dignus  (unworthy),  aptus  and  idoneus  (suitable,  fit).     (See  No. 
92.) 

Ex. — Hie  est  dignus  qui  imperet :  he  is  worthy  to  command. 

Quia  null  a  videbatur  aptior  persona,  quse  de  ilia  aetate  loquer- 
etur :  because  no  character  seemed  more  fit  to  talk  about  that 
age. 

4.  The  Consecutive  Subjunctive  is  used  with  quod,  quare,  cur, 
quamobrem,  ut,  after  est,  causa  est  (there  is  a  reason  why,  where- 
fore, for,  that)  ;  with  ubi,  unde,  quo;  after  habeo  quod,  and  es- 
pecially non  habeo  quod,  etc. 

Ex. — Est  quod  gaudeas :  there  is  reason  why  you  should  re- 
joice (for  your  rejoicing;  you  have  reason  to  rejoice). 

Habes  quod  irascaris :   you  have  reason  to  become  angry. 

Etsi  magis  est  quod  tibi  gratuler:  although  I  have  more  rea- 
son to  congratulate  you. 

5.  It  is  used  with  quod,  cur,  quamobrem,  ubi,  unde,  quo,  after 
such  expressions  as  non  est,  nihil  est,  non  est  causa,  nulla  est 
causa,  nihil  causae  est,  quid  est?   quid  causae  est?   quae  causa 
est? 

(See  subject  treated  fully  Peters'  Syntax  of  the  Latin  Verb.) 

Ex. — Non  fuit  causa  cur  postulares :  there  was  no  reason  why 
you  should  demand  (=you  had  no  right  to  demand). 

Quid  est  quod  (cur)  haec  me  moveant:  what  reason  is  there 
why  these  things  should  move  me  ? 

Quid  causa?  (qua?  causa)  est  cur,  etc.?  what  reason  is  there 
why.  etc.  ? 

Note  the  following  expressions : 


54  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

(  N"on  habeo  quod  dicam :  I  have  nothing  to  say. 

habeo  quid  dicam :  I  do  not  know  what  to  say. 
habeo  quo  earn:    I  have  no  place  (I  have  not  whither) 
to  go. 

Habes  ubi — ostentes :  you  have  an  opportunity  to  display,  etc. 
Quotusquisque  est  qui  voluptatem  neget  esse  bonum !  how  few 
are  there  to  say  that  (mere)  pleasure  is  not  a  blessing ! 

Quotus  est  quisque  qui  somniis  pareat !  how  few  are  there  that 
heed  dreams ! 

Bern. — Instead  of  qui  non,  quod  non  and  cur  non;  quin  may 
be  used  after  a  negative  expressed  or  implied.  ( See  86,  E.  2  & 

91) 

Verbs  of  Hindering,  Etc. 

89.  1.  Verbs  meaning  to  hinder,  to  prevent,  to  abstain,  to  re- 
frain, to  refuse,  to  omit,  to  delay  and  other  words  and  phrases  of 
like  meaning,  when  not  strengthened  by  a  negative,  take  quo- 
minus  (quo  minus)  or  ne  with  the  Subjunctive;  but  these  verbs 
strengthened  by  a  negative,  or  stated  interrogatively  with  nega- 
tive force,  take  quominus  or  quin  with  the  Subjunctive. 

2,  Verbs  and  expressions  of  doubt  and  uncertainty  when  neg- 
atived, or  stated  interrogatively  with  negative  force,  should  be 
followed  by  quin  -j-  Subjunctive. 

Eem.  1.  Impedire  and  prohibere  are  also  used  with  the  Accusa- 
tive and  the  Infinitive. 

Eem.  2.  Recusare  with  the  passives  of  prohibere,  impedire,  and 
deterrere  are  also  followed  by  the  simple  Infinitive. 

Eem.  3.  Dubitare,  meaning  "to  hesitate,"  should  be  used  with 
the  simple  Infinitive. 

Ex. — Impedior  ne  plura  dicam:  I  am  prevented  from  saying 
more. 

^Etas  non  impedit  (=prohibet)  quominus  agri  colendi  studia 
teneanms:  age  does  not  hinder  us  from  retaining  (—our  retain- 
ing) interest  in  agriculture. 

Eegulus,  ne  sententiam  diceret,  recusavit :  Eegulus  refused  to 
express  an  opinion. 

Quid  obstat  quominus  sit  beatus?  what  stands  in  the  way  of 
his  being  happy? 

Quis  impedit  quominus  (quin)  hoc  facias?  who  prevents  you 
from  doing  (—your  doing)  this? 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  55 

Antiochus  non  se  tenuit  quin  contra  suum  doctorem  librum 
ederet :  Antiochus  did  not  refrain  from  publishing  a  book  against 
his  teacher. 

Nullum  diem  praetermisit  (intermisit)  quin  ad  me  litteras 
mitteret :  he  has  not  let  a  day  pass  without  sending  me  a  letter. 

Nemo  dubitat  (quis  dubitat?  non  est  dubium)  quin  hoc  fac- 
turus  sit:  no  one  doubts  (who  doubts?  there  is  no  doubt)  that 
he  will  do  this. 

90.  Quin  is  used  with  the  impersonal  expressions  non  mul- 
tum, non  paulum,  non   (hand)   procul,  minimum,  nihil,  quid, 
etc. — abest. 

Ex. — Minimum  afuit  quin  hostes  nostram  aciem  perfring- 
erent:  the  enemy  came  very  near  breaking  (=very  little  was 
wanting  for  the  enemy  to  break,  that  the  enemy  should  break) 
through  our  line. 

Tanta  circa  fuga  ac  trepidatio  fuit  ut  non  multum  abesset, 
quin  opera  ac  vineae  desererentur :  there  was  such  flight  and  con- 
fusion around  that  the  engines  and  sheds  were  not  far  from  being 
(came  near  being)  abandoned. 

Non  multum  afuit  quin  oppidum  dux  caperet :  the  general  was 
not  far  from  taking  (did  not  lack  much  of  taking,  etc.,  etc.)  the 
town. 

Further  Remarks  on  Quin. 

91.  1.  After  a  negative  expressed  or  implied,  quin  may  be 
used  instead  of  the  Nominative  or  neuter  Accusative  of  the  rela- 
tive -f-  non,  i.  e.,  qui  non,  quae  non,  quod  non. 

Ex. — Nemo  vestrum  est  quin  (=qui  non)  saspe  audierit :  there 
is  not  one  of  you  that  has  not  (=but  has)  often  heard. 

Nulli  ex  itinere  excedere  licebat  quin  (=qui  non)  ab  equitatu 
Caesaris  exciperetur:  no  one  might  (was  allowed  to)  turn  aside 
from  the  march  without  being  cut  off  by  Caesar's  cavalry. 

Nulla  fuit  Thessaliae  civitas  quin  (=rquae  non)  Caesari  pareret : 
There  was  no  state  of  Thessaly  that  was  not  subject  to  Cassar. 

2.  It  also  takes  the  place  of  the  Ablative  after  some  negative 
expressions  of  time. 

Ex. — Dies  fere  nullus  est  quin  (=qui  non)  hie  meam  domum 
ventitet :  there  is  hardly  a  day  that  he  does  not  come  to  my  house. 

Rem.  1.  Quin  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  ut  non  after  a  neg- 
ative. See  note  on  Eesult  (86,  E.  2). 


5G  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

3.  It  occurs  after  non  ignoro,  negare  non  possum,  negari  non 
polest.  Also  after  nihil  causae  est,  nulla  causa  est,  quae  causa 
est?  quid  causae  est?  etc.,  instead  of  quod  non,,  or  cur  non 
(—there  is  no  reason  that  (why)  not,  what  reason  is  there  why 
not?). 

Ex. — Quid  causai  est  quin  rem  ad  senatum  referam?  what 
reason  is  there  why  I  should  not  lay  the  matter  before  (=carry 
the  matter  to)  the  senate? 

Eem.  2.  Note  also  that  after  verbs  of  doubting,  etc.,  a  depen- 
dent sentence  with  quin  is  made  negative  by  using  non. 

Ex. — Non  dubitabat  quin — non  posset:  he  did  not  doubt  (he 
felt  sure)  that  he  would  not  be  able,,  etc. 

92.  With  verbs  of  hindering,  doubting,  etc.,  given  above  (see 
89,  and  foil.)  words  like  vix  and  aegre    (scarcely,  hardly)  are 
treated  as  negatives. 

Ex. — Nostri  vix  retineri  potuerunt  quin  impetum  in  hostes 
statim  f acerent :  our  men  could  hardly  be  restrained  from  mak- 
ing an  attack  upon  the  enemy  immediately. 

Facere  Non. Possum  and  Fieri  Non  Potest. 

93.  1.  Facere  non  possum  quin  )   T 

>  I  cannot  but.  I  cannot  help 
Facere  non  possum  ut  non.    ) 

Facere  non  possum  ut :  I  cannot  bring  it  about  ^( cause,  make) 
that. 

Ex. — Facere  non  possum  quin  sententiam  dicam :  I  cannot  but 
express  (=help  expressing)  my  opinion. 

Facere  non  possum  ut  sententiam  dicam :  I  cannot  bring  my- 
self to  (make  myself)  express  an  opinion. 

Instead  of  facer e  non  possum  quin  -\-  Subjunctive,  non  pos- 
sum non  -|-  infinitive  is  used. 

Ex. — Non  possum  non  credere:  I  cannot  but  believe  (=1  am 
not  able  not  to  believe). 

2.  Fieri  potest  ut :  it  may  be,  can  be,  is  possible,  that. 

Fieri  potest  ut  non :  it  may  be,  can  be,  is  possible,  that  not. 

Fieri  non  potest  ut :   it  cannot  be,  is  not  possible,  that. 

Fieri  non  potest  quin.        (     It  cannot  be,  is  not  possible,  that 

Fieri  non  potest  ut  non  c  not. 

Ex. — Fieri  potest  ut  fallar:  it  may  be  (is  possible)  that  I  am 
mistaken ;  or,  I  may  be  mistaken. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  57 

Fieri  non  potest  ut  fallar:  it  cannot  be  (is  not  possible)  that 
I  am  mistaken;  or,  I  cannot  be  mistaken,  surely  I  am  not  mis- 
taken. 

(  fallar.    It  cannot  be  that  I  am  not 
Jbieri  non  potest  qum.      > 

-r,.     .  C      mistaken.     (I  must  be  mistaken, 

£  len  non  potest  ut  non.    t 

surely  I  am  mistaken) . 

Fieri  non  potest  quin  veniat :  it  cannot  be  that  he  is  not  com- 
ing, or  will  not  come.  (He  must  come,  surely  he  will  come.) 

Kern. — In  sentences  like  those  given  above  both  facer e  and 
fieri  may  be  omitted. 

94.  Per  aliquem   (aliquid)   stare:    it  is  owing  to  some  one 
(something). 

The  phrase  is  impersonal  like  fieri  potest. 

1.  Per  me  stat  ut :  it  is  owing  to  me  (my  fault)  that. 

2.  Per  me  non  stat  ut:   it  is  not  owing  to  me  (not  my  fault) 
that. 

3.  Per  me  stat  quominus:   it  is  owing  to  me  (my  fault)  that 
not. 

4.  Per  me- non  stat  quominus :   it  is  not  owing  to  me  (not  my 
fault)  that  not. 

Ex. — Per  ducem  ignavum  stat  ut  agri  sociorum  vastentur :  it 
is  owing  to  (the  fault  of)  a  cowardly  leader  that  the  fields  of  the 
allies  are  being  laid  waste. 

Per  Trebonium  stetit  quominus  oppido  potirentur:  it  was 
ov;ing  to  (the  fault  of)  Trebonius  that  they  did  not  gain  posses- 
sion of  the  town. 

Caesar  ubi  cognovit  per  Afranium  stare  quominus  proelio  dimi- 
caretur:  when  Caesar  found  out  that  it  was  owing  to  Afranius 
that  a  battle  was  not  fought,  etc. 

Bern. — In  3  ne  might  be  used,  and  in  4  quin  might  be  used, 
but  quominus  is  far  more  usual. 

95.  Tantum  abest :   "so  far  from/'  "instead  of." 

1.  Tantum  abest  is  used  with  two  uts — tantum  abest  -  -  ut 
-  -  ut.    The  phrase  is  impersonal. 

2.  The  first  ut  may  be  omitted,  and  a  substantive  with  a  or  ab 
used  instead,  in  which  case  the  phrase  is  personal. 

3.  The  second  ut  may  be  omitted  and  a  principal  sentence  used 
instead.    The  phrase  is  impersonal. 


58  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

Ex. — 1.  Tantum  abest  ab  eo  ut  malum  mors  sit,  ut  verear  ne 
homini  sit  nihil  bonum  aliud :  so  far  is  death  from  being  an  evil 
that  I  fear  man  has  no  other  blessing. 

2.  Equidem  tantum  absum  ab  ista  sententia  ut  non  modo  non 
arbitrer — sed,  etc. :  indeed,  so  far  am  I  from  that  opinion  that  I 
not  only  do  not  think — but,  etc. 

3.  Tantum  abest  ut  hi  voluptates  consectentur,  etiam  curas, 
sollicitudines,  vigilias  perferunt:   so  far  from  (instead  of)  pur- 
suing pleasures,  they  endure  even  cares,  anxieties  and  watchings. 

1.  Tantum  afuit  ut  Rhodii  nostram  classem  tuerentur,  ut 
etiam  portu  prohiberent  nostros  milites:  so  far  were  the  Rho- 
dians  from  protecting  our  fleet  that  they  even  kept  our  soldiers 
from  the  harbor. 

3.  Ehodii,  tantum  afuit  ut  nostram  classem  tuerentur,  etiam 
portu  prohibuerunt  nostros  milites:  the  Rhodians,  so  far  from 
protecting  our  fleet,  even  kept  our  soldiers  from  the  harbor. 

Rem. — In  case  of  two  uts,  the  first  is  Potential,  the  second  is 
the  ut  of  Result. 


THE  OPTATIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

96.   The  Optative  Subjunctive  has  many  uses,  the  most  im- 
portant of  which  are  here  given. 
Will  is  the  characteristic. 

Wishes. 

Wishes  are  of  two  kinds :  1.  Those  that  may  be  realized.  2. 
Those  that  cannot  be  realized. 

Tn  the  statement  of  a  wish,  the  Subjunctive  is  used  alone  or 
with  utinam,  ut  (rare),  si,  or  0  si  (poetical),  in  the  positive 
form;  with  ne,  utinam  ne,  or  utinam  non  (to  negative  a  single 
word),  in  the  negative  form. 

Wish  Possible. 

When  the  wish  may  be  realized,  when  the  decision  is  in  sus- 
pense, no  matter  how  extravagant  the  wish  may  be,  the  tenses 
are  the  Present  and  Perfect. 

Ex. — Huic  utinam  aliquando  gratiam  ref erre  possimus :  may 
I  be  able  at  some  time  to  make  a  return  to  him. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  59 

Quod  omen  di  avertant :  which  omen  may  the  gods  avert. 

Utinam  salvus  advenerit :   may  it  be  that  he  has  arrived  safe. 

Utinam  ne  in  periculum  ducatur:  0  that  he  may  not  be  led 
into  danger. 

0  mini  prseteritos  ref erat  si  Juppiter  annos :  0  if  Jupiter 
would  bring  back  to  me  the  years  that  are  past. 

Note  here  velim  and  velim  ne  with  the  Subjunctive. 

Ex. — Velim  ad  me  saepe  scribas :  I  should  like  you  to  write  to 
me  (=--1  wish  you  would  write,  please  write)  often.  (Frequent 
in  Cicero's  Letters.) 

Wish  Impossible. 

When  the  wish  cannot  be  realized,  when  the  decision  is  ad- 
verse— a  vain  regret — use  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunc- 
tive, according  as  the  time  is  present  or  past. 

Ex. — Utinam  ne  vera  dicerem :  would  that  I  were  not  speaking 
truth. 

Utinam  mihi  amici  crederent :  would  that  my  friends  trusted 
me. 

Quod  utinam  minus  vitas  cupidi  fuissemus.  Wherefore,  would 
that  I  had  been  less  eager  for  life. 

Utinam  ille  omnes  secum  suas  copias  eduxisset:  would  that 
he  had  led  out  all  his  forces  with  him. 

Utinam  suspicionem  vitare  potuissem :  0  that  I  had  been  able 
to  avoid  (could  have  avoided)  suspicion. 

When  the  wish  is  impossible  of  realization,  instead  of  utinam 
or  utinam  ne  with  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive,  vel- 
lem  may  be  used  with  the  same  tenses  for  the  positive,  and  vellem 
ne  or  nollem  for  the  negative. 

Ex. — Vellem  adesse  posset  Panastius:  would  that  (or,  I  wish 
that)  Panaetms  could  be  present. 

Nollem  Corinthum  sustulissent :  would  that  they  had  not  de- 
stroyed Corinth. 

Mallem  (I  would  rather,  I  had  rather,  I  should  have  prefer- 
red) is  also  used  with  same  tenses. 

Ex. — Mallem  divitias  mihi  dedisses :  I  would  rather  you  had 
given  me  riches. 

Mallem  secum  suos  milites  eduxisset:  I  had  rather  he  had 
taken  out  with  him  as  his  soldiers,  etc. 


60  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Subjunctive  in  Asseverations. 

97.  To  the  Optative  Subjunctive  belongs  the  Subjunctive  in 
oaths  and  asseverations.     The  negative  of  course  is  ne.     The 
tense  is  the  Present. 

The  matter  denied  is  introduced  by  si  with  a  mood  and  tense 
depending  on  the  sense  of  the  sentence. 

The  matter  insisted  upon,  affirmed,  is  expressed  by  ni,  nisi 
(less  often  si  non),  sometimes  ut,  with  the  Indicative,  or  by  the 
Indicative  alone.,  unless  some  outside  influence  calls  for  the  Sub- 
junctive. 

The  expressions  most  frequently  occurring  are,  moriar,  peream, 
inter  earn,  ne  vivam,  ne  sim  salvus,  ita  vivam  (as  I  live),  ita  me 
dii  ament. 

Ex. — Moriar  ni  puto :  may  I  die  if  I  do  not  think,  etc. 

ISTe  sim  salvus  si  aliter  scribo  ac  sentio :  may  I  die  if  I  write 
otherwise  than  I  feel. 

Ita  vivam  ut  maximos  sumptus  f acio :  as  I  live,  I  am  making 
very  great  outlays. 

Moriar  si  magis  gauderem,  si  id  mihi  accidisset :  let  me  die  if 
I  would  rejoice  more,  if  that  thing  had  happened  to  me. 

The  Conditional  Wish. 

98.  To  the    Optative    Subjunctive   belongs   the  Conditional 
Wish,  introduced  by  dum,  dummodo  (dum  modo),  modo — "pro- 
vided," "provided  that,"  "if  only" ;   negative  dum  ne,  dummodo 
ne,  modo  ne — "provided  not,"  "provided  that  not,"  "if  only  not." 

When  the  wish  may  still  be  realized,  is  in  suspense,  use  the 
Present  (and  Perfect?).  When  it  cannot  be  realized,  is  adverse 
—a  regret — use  the  Imperfect  (and  Pluperfect?). 

Rem.  1.  There  seems  to  be  no  apparent  reason  why  the  Perfect 
and  Pluperfect  should  not  be  used  here ;  but  Perfect  is  very  rare, 
and  of  Pluperfect  no  examples  are  given. 

Ex. — Oderint  dum  metuant :   let  them  hate  if  only  they  fear. 

Magno  me  metu  liberabis  dummodo  inter  me  atque  te  murus 
intersit :  you  will  relieve  me  of  great  fear  if  only  there  be  a  wall 
between  you  and  me. 

Non  laboro  dum  ne  tibi  videar :  I  do  not  care  provided  I  do  not 
seem  so  to  you. 

Rem.  2.  Sometimes  ut  is  used  with  modo  to  strengthen  it. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  61 

\ 

Rem.  3.  When  the  expression  "if  only/'  implies  a  restriction 
merely,  and  not  a  wish,  si  modo  is  used  with  the  Indicative, 
unless  the  Subjunctive  is  demanded  for  some  other  reason. 

The  Concessive  Subjunctive. 

99.  To  the  Optative  Subjunctive  must  be  referred  the  Con- 
cessive Subjunctive  translated  "granted  that,"  "supposing  that," 
"though. "'    Here  the  Subjunctive  is  used  alone  or  withast  ut,  for 
the  positive;   with  ne,  or  ut  non  (to  negative  single  word),  for 
the  negative.    The  tenses  are  the  Present  and  Perfect  generally. 
When,  however,  unreality  is  prominent  in  present  or  past  time, 
use  the  Imperfect  or  Pluperfect  respectively. 

Ex. — Ne  sit  sane  summum  malum  dolor,  malum  certe  est : 
granting  that  sorrow  be  not  indeed  the  chief  evil,  it  is  at  least  an 
evil. 

Millia  f rumenti  tua  triverit  area  centum :  granted  that  your 
threshing  floor  has  yielded  a  hundred  thousand  measures  of 
grain. 

Ut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda  voluntas:  though  the 
strength  be  wanting,  nevertheless  the  will  is  to  be  commended. 

Ut  rationem  Plato  nullam  afferret,  ipsa  auctoritate  me  frang- 
eret:  though  Plato  brought  up  no  reason,  he  would  break  me 
down  by  his  very  authority. 

NOTE. — The  Imperative  Subjunctive,  the  Subjunctive  in  sen- 
tences of  Design, and  with  verbs  of  Fearing,  etc.,  are  all  embraced 
in  the  Optative. 

The  Potential  Subjunctive. 

100.  By  this  form  a  mere  opinion  of  the  speaker  or  writer 
is  expressed,  a  mere  thought,  probability,  or  possibility  is  pre- 
sented. 

Furthermore,  this  Subjunctive  is  used  to  soften  an  assertion 
and  give  it  the  character  of  modesty  or  politeness.  In  short,  an 
element  of  modesty,  hesitation,  vagueness,  or  uncertainty  is  al- 
ways present.  It  may  be  translated, by  may,  can,  must,  might, 
could,  would,  and  should,  or  by  other  turns  apt  for  expressing  the 
potential  idea. 

The  negative  is  non,  or  it  may  be  in  the  forms  nemo,  nihil, 
nullus  f  nunquam,  etc. 

The  tenses  are  the  Present  and  Perfect,  when  referring  to  Pres- 
ent or  future  time ;  the  Imperfect,  when  referring  to  past  time. 


62  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

Bern.  1.  The  Potential  Subjunctive  often  occurs  with  the  Ideal 
Second  Person  ("one,"  "we,"  etc.),  with  forsitan  ("perhaps"), 
and  likewise  in  the  Ideal  (Potential)  Condition. 

Eem.  2.  It  is  often  impossible  to  make  any  distinction  in  trans- 
lation between  the  Potential  Present  and  Perfect. 

Examples  of  Present  and  Perfect. — Velim  (I  should  wish, 
like),  nolim  (I  should  be  unwilling),  rrialim  (I  should  prefer), 
die-as  (one,  we  may  say),  credos  (one  would  believe),  dicat,  dix- 
erit  aliquis  (some  one  may  say),  dixerim  (I  may  be  allowed  to 
say,  I  may  perhaps  say). 

Hie  quaerat  quispiam :   here  some  one  may  ask. 

Nee  tamen  affirmaverim :  and  yet  I  may  not  assert. 

Non  inter  Germanise  populos  numeraverim :  I  may  not  (must 
not)  count  among  the  peoples  of  Germany,  etc. 

Ego  facilius  crediderim:  I  should  (would,  might)  more 
readily  believe. 

Nil  ego  contulerim  iucundo  sanus  amico :  while  in  my  right 
mind  I  should  compare  nothing  to  an  agreeable  friend. 

Examples  of  Potential  of  Past. — Vellem  (I  should  have 
wished,  liked),  nollem  (I  should  have  been  unwilling),  mallem 
(I  should  have  preferred). 

Crederes  victos :   one  might  have  thought  them  beaten. 

Haud  facile  decerneres  utrum  Hannibal  imperatori,  an  exer- 
citui  carior  esset :  one  could  not  have  easily  decided  whether 
Hannibal  was  dearer  to  the  general  or  to  the  army. 

Miraretur  qui  turn  cerneret :  any  one  who  saw  it  then  must 
have  wondered. 

Qui  equum  videret,  urbem  captam  diceret :  whoever  had  seen 
the  horse  would  have  said  that  the  city  was  taken. 

The  Potential  Question. 

101.  The  Potential  Question  is  of  two  kinds — Deliberative 
and  Rhetorical.  They  often  lie  very  close  together.  The  tenses 
are  the  Present  and  Perfect.  The  negative  is  non  (see  above). 

1.  In  the  deliberative  form  one  is  embarrassed,  undecided,  hes- 
itates, deliberates  what  to  do. 

Ex. — Quid  faciam?  what  am  I  to  do?  (what  shall  I,  can  I, 
do?). 

Quo  me  vertam  ?  whither  shall  I  turn  ? 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  63 

Quid  facerem  (agerem)  ?  what  was  I  to  do? 

2.  In  the  rhetorical  form  an  answer  is  implied  contrary  to  the 
form  and  substance  of  the  question.  (See  71.) 

The  question  is  here  stated  in  Potential  language. 

Ex. — Quis  hoc  credat  ?  who  would  believe  this  ? 

Quis  hoc  dixerit  ?  who  would  say  this  ? 

Quis  contulerit  Gracchos  de  seditione  querentes?  who  could 
(would)  endure  the  Gracchi  complaining  of  rebellion? 

Quid  f  aceret  aliud  ?  what  else  was  he  to  do  ? 

Quis  putaret  ?  who  would  have  thought  it  ? 

NOTE. — The  question  introduced  by  quidni  (or  quid — ni), 
"why  not/7  belongs  to  the  Potential  Rhetorical  Question. 

Cum. 

102.  Cum  Historical  (=when) — with  Subjunctive — Imper- 
fect and  Pluperfect  tenses. 

Cum  Causal  (=as,  since) — with  Subjunctive — any  tense. 

Cum  Concessive  (=although) — with  Subjunctive — any  tense. 

Cum  Temporal  (=when,  whenever,  as  often  as,  if) — with  the 
Indicative — any  tense. 

It  has  a  wide  use,  and  may  be  best  remembered  by  several  sim- 
ple rules. 

1.  Cum  (=when)  depending  upon  a  definite  word  of  time 
always  has  the  Indicative.    It  is  merely  a  relative. 

2.  Cum  (=when,  whenever,  as  often  as),  with  any  tense  of 
the  Indicative. 

3.  Cum  (=when,  if),  with  the  Present  and  Future  of  the  In- 
dicative. 

(2.  and  3.  Cum  meaning  "when"  with  a  Present  or  Future 
tense,  and  cum  meaning  "whenever/'  with  any  tense,  have  the 
Indicative.) 

4.  Cum  with  periods  of  time  (=that,  since,  cf.  ex  quo,  ut,  and 
quod),  with  the  Present,  Perfect,  Aorist,  Imperfect,  and  Pluper- 
fect Indicative. 

Cum  Inversum  (when)  takes  the  Indicative.  In  the  leading 
member  are  used  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect,  usually  with  iam, 
nondum,  vix,  commodum,  etc. ;  in  the  cum  member,  the  Aorist, 
Historical  Present,  and  Historical  Infinitive,  frequently  with 
sulnto,  repente,  interim,,  etc. 


64  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

In  the  case  of  cum  inversum,  the  cum  member  really  contains 
the  important  statement,  but  is  made  grammatically  dependent. 

Cum — turn  (both — and  especially,,  not  only — but  also).  Turn 
is  often  strengthened  by  maxime,  praecipue,  etiam,  etc. 

Examples  of  cum— 

Cum  Historical. — Cum  esses  Romas :  when  you  were  at  Rome. 
Cum  Romam  venisses :  when  you  had  come  to  Rome.  ( Most  com- 
mon use  of  cum). 

Cum  Causal. — Quas  cum  ita  sint:  since  these  things  are  so. 
Sed  cum  ille  apud  hostem  manserit,  ad  vos  veni :  but  since  he  has 
remained  with  the  enemy,  I  have  come  to  you.  Caesar,  cum 
sciret :  Caesar,  as  he  knew,  etc.  Cum  venire  non  posset :  as  he 
could  not  come. 

Cum  Concessive. — Cum  primi  ordines  hostium  concidissent, 
tamen  reliqui  acerrime  resistebant:  although  the  first  ranks  of 
the  enemy  had  fallen,  nevertheless  the  rest  resisted  most  vigor- 
ously. Cum  vellet,  tamen  non  poterat :  although  he  was  willing, 
yet  he  could  not.  Cum  sis  gravissimo  iudicio  taciturnitatis  op- 
pressus:  although  you  have  been  overwhelmed  with  the  most 
weighty  judgment  of  silence. 

Cum  Temporal. — 1.  Turn  cum  multi  principes  civitatis  Roma 
profugerunt:  at  that  time  when  many  leaders  of  the  state  fled 
from  Rome.  Illo  die,  cum  tu  ipse  mihi  dixisti:  on  that  day 
when  you  yourself  told  me. 

2.  Cum  signum  dederat,  milites  clamorem  tollebant :  whenever 
he  gave  the  signal,  the  soldiers  would  raise  a  shout.    Ad  te  scrib- 
am  cum  Athenas  advenero:    I  shall  write  to  you  when  I  reach 
Athens. 

3.  Cum  ver  appetit,  milites  ex  hibernis  mo  vent:  when  spring 
approaches,  the  soldiers  move  out  of  winter-quarters. 

4.  lam  multi  anni  sunt,  cum  apud  vos  vivo :  it  is  now  many 
years  that  I  have  been  living  among  you.    . 

Cum  Inversum. — lam  Sora  capta  erat,  cum  consules  prima 
luce  advenere :  Sora  had  already  been  taken  when  the  consuls 
arrived  at  daybreak. 

lam  locum  relinquebat  cum  subito  clamorem  audivit :  he  was 
already  leaving  the  place,  when  suddenly  he  heard  a  cry. 

In  eo  erat  ut  oppidum  caperetur,  cum  auxilium  a  sociis  latum 
est. 


HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES.  65 

The  town  was  an  the  point  of  being  taken,  when  assistance  was 
brought  from  the  allies. 

lam  nona  ferme  diei  hora  erat  cum  Eomanus  .  .  .  signum 
receptui  dedit :  it  was  now  almost  the  ninth  hour  of  the  day  when 
the  Eoman  .  .  .  gave  the  signal  for  retreat. 

Cum-tum. — Cum  senatus  turn  populus :  both  the  senate  and 
especially  the  people. 

Magni  cum  tui  f ratris  turn  maxime  tua  ipsius  interest :  it 
greatly  concerns  not  only  your  brother,  but  you  yourself  espe- 
cially. 

NOTE. — Memini  cum  (I  remember  when,  i.  e.,  the  time  when) 
takes  the  Indicative. 

Audire  cum  (to  hear  when)  takes  the  Subjunctive. 

The  Imperative. 

103.  The  Imperative  mood  expresses  an  order,  an  exhorta- 
tion, a  request,  a  prayer,  a  law,  or  a  precept.    "The  tone  varies 
from  stern  command  to  piteous  entreaty."    The  time  is  future. 

There  are  two  forms — the  Short  form,  or  First  Imperative, 
which  points  to  the  near  future,  to  immediate  fulfillment;  the 
long  form,  or  Second  Imperative,  which  points  more  or  less  re- 
motely to  the  future: 

The  former  is  the  common  Imperative,  the  Imperative  of  ordi- 
nary use ;  the  latter  is  used  chiefly  in  laws,  maxims,  precepts,  and 
wills. 

The  short  form  has  only  the  second  person,  the  others  being 
supplied  from  the  Present  and  Perfect  Subjunctive.  The  long 
form  has  the  second  and  third  persons. 

104.  First  Imperative — usual  forms. 

Singular.    Positive. 

1.  Laudem:  let  me  praise  (may  I  praise). 

2.  Lauda:  praise.    Laudes:  may  you  praise ;  one  (we)  must  or 

should  praise.     (Do  not  use  with  definite  subject). 

3.  Laudet:  let  him  praise  (may  he  praise). 

Plural. 

1.  Laudemus :   let  us  praise  (may  we  praise). 

2.  Laudate:   praise  (ye  or  you).    Laudetis  (rare). 

3.  Laudent :   let  them  praise  (may  they  praise). 


66  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Singular.     Negative. 

1.  Ne  laudem:  let  me  not  praise  (may  I  not  praise). 

2.  Ne  laudaveris,  or  noli  laudare :  do  not  praise.    Ne  lauda.    (Do 

not  use.) 
Ne  laudes :  may  you  not  praise;  one  (we)  must  or  should  not 

praise.     (Do  not  use  with  definite  subject). 
3.  Ne  laudet:   let  him  not  praise  (may  he  not  praise). 

Plural. 

1.  Ne  laudemus :  let  us  not  praise  (may  we  not  praise). 

2.  Ne  laudaveritis,  or  nolite  laudare :  do  not  praise.    Ne  laudate 

(poetical).    Ne  laudetis  (rare). 

3.  Ne  laudent :  let  them  not  praise  (may  they  not  praise) . 
Eem.  1.  The  negative  may  be  continued  by  neve  (neu). 

Rem.  2.  The  negative  also  occurs  in  the  forms  ne  quis,  ne  quid, 
nemo,,  niliilf  nullus,  neque  (nee),  nunquam,  etc. 

Eem.  3.  The  Optative  translation  is  given  above  beside  the 
usual  Imperative  English,  and  may  show  how  readily  the  Imper- 
ative of  these  persons  is  derived  from  the  Optative  Subjunctive. 

105.  There  are  several  other  periphrases  of  the  Imperative. 
The  second  and  third  persons  of  the  Future  sometimes  have  im- 
perative force. 

Note  also,  cura  ut  +  the  Subjunctive,  fac  ut,  or  fac  alone,  + 
the  Subjunctive  (Positive.)  Fac  ne  -f-  the  Subjunctive,  cave  ne, 
or  better,  cave  alone  -\-  the  Subjunctive  (Negative). 

The  translation  is  "be  sure  to,"  "take  care  to,"  an  emphatic 
"do,"  etc.,  etc., 

Cura  ut  quam  primum  venias :  manage  to  come  as  soon  as 
possible. 

Fac  cogites :  do  reflect.  Cave  hoc  facias :  take  care  not  to  do 
this. 

106.  The  Second  Imperative  or  Long  Form  is  clearly  given 
in  the  grammars.    Laudato :  thou  shalt  praise.    Ne  laudato :  thou 
shalt  not  praise,  etc. 

CAUTION. — The  forms  scito,  scitote,  memento,  mementote, 
habeto,  habetote  (=to  know,  to  remember)  are  used  exclusively 
instead  of  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  First  Imperative. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  67 

107.  A  sort  of  Imperative  of  the  Past  is  expressed  by  the  Plu- 
perfect, less  often  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive,  instead  of  using  a 
form  of  debeo  -4-  Infinitive. 

Ex. — Ne  poposcisses:  you  should  not  have  asked  for  them. 
Pot-ins  doceret :  he  should  rather  have  shown,  etc. 

Oratio  Recta  and  Oratio  Obliqua. 

108.  Oratio  Recta,  or  Direct  Discourse,  is  the  expression  of 
what  some  one  says  or  thinks,  in  his  own  language.    It  is  a  direct 
quotation. 

Oratio  Eecta  is  generally  introduced  by  inquit,  which  is  placed 
parenthetically  in  the  body  of  the  quoted  language,  after  one  or 
more  words.  It  should  not,  however,  separate  words  having  a 
close  connection. 

109.  Oratio  Obliqua,  or  Indirect  Discourse,  is  that  form  of 
speech  or  writing  in  which  the  substance  of  something  said, 
thought,  or  felt  by  A  is  communicated  by  B  to  C  in  B's  language 
or  with  B's  inflection.    A  is  the  original  speaker,  B  is  the  reporter 
or  narrator,  and  C  is  the  reader  or  hearer. 

A  person  may  give  the  substance  of  what  he  himself  said, 
thought,  or  felt  at  some  other  time.  This  is  Subjective  Oratio 
Obliqua. 

The  leading  facts,  i.  e.,  the  principal  clauses,  are  expressed  by 
the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive;  subordinate  clauses,  with 
verb  in  the  Subjunctive. 

Socrates  dicere  solebat — 

0.  E.  "Omnes  in  eo  quod  sciunt  satis  sunt  eloquent es." 

0.  0.  Omnes  in  eo  quod  scirent  satis  esse  eloquentes. 

0.  E.  Socrates  used  to  say,  "All  men  are  eloquent  enough  in 
what  they  understand." 

0.  0.  Socrates  used  to  say  that  all  men  were  eloquent  enough 
in  what  they  understood. 

In  transferring  0.  E.  to  0.  0.  changes  are  made  in  (1)  moods, 
(2)  tenses,  (3)  pronouns,  (4)  adverbs  of  time  and  place. 

Now  the  reporter  may  narrate  from  his  own  standpoint  or 
from  that  of  the  speaker.  The  time  of  the  speaker  is  the  present ; 
the  time  of  the  reporter  is  past  (or  it  may  be  the  general  pres- 
ent). To  understand  this,  a  piece  of  0.  E.  should  be  changed  to 


68  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

0.  0.  from  dicit  and  from  dixit.  Even  when  the  leading  verb  is 
past  (dixit),  the  reporter  often  shifts  to  the  standpoint  of  the 
speaker  and  back  again. 

Speaker — Socrates  dicit  omnes  in  eo  quod  sciant  satis  esse  elo- 
quentes. 

Eeporter — Socrates  dicebat  omnes  in  eo  quod  scirent  satis  esse 
eloquent  es. 

A  verb  of  saying,,  thinking,  etc.,  is  often  not  expressed.  The 
transition  to  0.  0.  is  frequently  sudden  and  without  warning. 

Partial  O.  O.,  or  O.  O.  Reference. 

110.  When  the  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  is  used  in  prin- 
cipal clauses  with  the  Subjunctive  in  subordinate  clauses,  the 
0.  0.  is  evident.    But  the  Subjunctive  often  occurs  in  a  subordi- 
nate clause  when  there  is  apparently  nothing  to  call  for  it.     In 
such  cases  the  Subjunctive  may  present  the  thought,  opinion  or 
reason  of  some  one  else  (than  the  narrator).    This  is  called  Par- 
tial 0.  0.,  or  0.  0.  Keference. 

Ex. — Nova  nupta  net  quod  ire  necesse  sit :  the  bride  weeps  be- 
cause she  must  needs  go  (as  she  says). 

Miles  gloriatur  quod  hostem  vicerit :  the  soldier  boasts  because 
he  has  conquered  the  enemy  (as  he  says). 

As  to  whether  the  Subjunctive  or  the  Indicative  shall  be  used 
in  such  cases  depends  entirely  on  the  conception. 

The  Imperative  in  O.  O. 

111.  In  0.  0.  Imperative  sentences  are  expressed  by  the  Sub- 
junctive according  to  the  rule  after  verbs  of  ordering,  because  in 
such  cases  the  verb  of  saying,,  etc.,  actually  becomes  a  verb  of 
ordering. 

The  tenses  are  Present  or  Imperfect  according  as  the  lead- 
ing verb  is  present  or  past.  In  positive  sentences  ut  may  be  used 
with  the  first  only.  In  negative  sentences  ne  is  always  used. 

Ex. — Pythia  respondit  ut  mcenibus  ligneis  se  def enderent :  the 
Pythia  answered  that  they  should  defend  themselves  with  walls 
of  wood. 

Daret  utrum  vellet,  subclamatum  est :  they  cried  out  that  he 
should  give  (let  him  give)  which  of  the  two  he  wished. 

(Dixit)  proinde  aut  cederent  animo  atque  virtute  genti  per 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  69 

€os  dies  totiens  ab  se  victse  aut,  etc. :  wherefore  let  them  (that 
they  should)  give  way  in  spirit  and  valor  to  a  nation  so  often  de- 
feated by  them  during  those  days  or,  etc. 

Feg. — Ne  cederent,  etc. :  let  them  not  (that  they  should  not) 
give  way,  etc. 

(Dicit)  .  .  .  discedant:  that  they  shall  (let  them)  depart. 

Eem. — As  is  the  case  in  sentences  of  Design,  a  transfer  from 
positive  to  negative  is  made  by  neve  (neu)  or  neque  (nee).  The 
negative  is  continued  by  neve  (neu)  rarely  by  neque  (nee). 
(See  82-'6.) 

Pergeret  porro  ire,  nee  ultra  inquireret,  sineretque  fata  in  oc- 
culto  esse :  let  him  proceed  straight  on  and  not  inquire  further, 
but  suffer  the  fates  to  remain  hidden. 


CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES. 

112.  The  Conditional  Sentence  is  composed  of  two  members 
—the  Protasis  and  the  Apodosis.  The  former  contains  the  condi- 
tion and  is  introduced  by  si,  nisi,  etc.;  the  latter  contains  the 
conclusion. 

The  Protasis  is  subordinate  to  the  Apodosis,  hence  in  0.  0.  the 
Apodosis  is  changed  to  the  Accusative  -j-  the  Infinitive,  and  the 
Protasis  has  its  verb  in  the  Subjunctive. 

The  Protasis  is  introduced  by  si  (if),  si  non,  nisi,  ni  (if  not, 
unless,  etc.). 

(In  English  and  German  the  "if"  may  be  expressed  by  an  in- 
verted arrangement.  Ex. — Were  it  so,  he  would  act  differently.) 

A.  Si  non  is  used — 

1.  When  a  single  word  is  negatived. 

2.  When  a  contrast  is  formed  by  repetition  of  same  verb. 
Ex. — Si  feceris,  magnam  habebo  gratiam;    si  non  feceris,  ig- 

noscam :   if  you  do  it,  I  will  be  very  grateful ;   if  you  do  not,  I 
will  pardon  you. 

3.  When  there  is  a  contrast  between  the  Protasis  and  Apodosis 
which  is  heightened  by  at  tamen,  certe,  or  saltern  in  the  Apodosis. 
The  condition  is  here  concessive. 

Ex. — Si  mihi  bona  republica  f  rui  non  licuerit,  at  carebo  mala : 
if  I  shall  not  be  allowed  to  enjoy  a  good  government,  I  will  at 
least  be  without  a  bad  one. 

8i  minus  is  also  used  here. 


70  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Ex. — Hominem,  si  minus  supplicio  afnci,  at  custodiri  oport- 
ebat :  the  man  ought  at  least  to  have  been  held  in  custody,  if  not 
punished. 

B.  Si  minus  (="if  not'7)  occurs  generally  without  a  verb  ex- 
pressed.    (See  example  above.)     But  note — si  minus  potuissent 
(Caesar,  B.  G.  II.,  9).    If  they  could  not  (=should  not  be  able). 

C.  Nisi  (=if  not,  except,  unless,  but)  is  more  usual  than  si 
non  after  negatives. 

Rem. — Nisi  forte  (except  by  chance,  unless  per- 


haps). 

Nisi  vero  (unless  indeed,  in  truth). 
Nisi   quod    (=pra2terquam   quod)  :    ex- 


The  mood  is 

the 
Indicative. 


cept  the  fact  that,  except  that,  only 

that. 

D.  Ni  (=nisi,  si  non)  belongs  rather  to  an  early  period,  but 
is  quite  often  met  with  even  in  good  prose.  It  is  common  in 
poetry,  in  the  language  of  law,  in  colloqual  style,  in  oaths, 
threats,  etc. 

118  If  to  a  conditional  statement  a  second  one  is  opposed, 
by  which  the  first  is  cancelled  or  excluded,  then  sin,  sin  autem 
(si  autem,  sin  minus,  sin  aliter)  are  used  with  the  meaning 
"but  if/7  "if  not/'  "if  however/7  "if  on  the  contrary/7  "but  if 
not/7  etc. 

Ex. — Mercatura,  si  tenuis  est,  sordida  putanda  est ;  sin  magna 
et  copiosa,  non  est  admodum  vituperanda :  mercantile  business, 
if  it  is  petty,  is  to  be  considered  low;  if  however  (but  if)  it  is 
great  and  abundant,  it  is  not  to  be  found  fault  with  much. 

114.  If  the  verb  in  a  Protasis,  opposed  to  a  preceding  state- 
ment or  condition,  is  to  be  supplied,  then  si  minus,  sin  minus, 
sin  aliter,  less  often  si  non,  are  used.     (Also  sin  autem,  si  nihil 
aliud,  sin  secus.) 

Ex. — Educ  tecum  etiam  omnes  tuos;  si  minus,  quam  pluri- 
mos :  take  out  with  you,  too,  all  yours  follows ;  if  not  all,  as  many 
as  possible. 

115.  The  Protasis  may  be  variously  represented. 
1.  By  a  relative  clause. 

Ex. — Miraretur  qui  turn  cerneret :  any  one  who  saw  it  (if  any 
one,  etc.)  then,  must  have  wondered. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  71 

2.  By  an  adjective  or  participle,  by  an  Ablative  Absolute,  or  by 
some  other  word  or  phrase. 

Ex. — Non  potestis  voluptate  omnia  dirigentes  aut  tueri  aut  re- 
tinere  virtutem :  you  can  neither  guard  nor  retain  virtue  if  you 
direct  everything  by  pleasure. 

Maximas  virtutes  iacere  omnes  necesse  est,  voluptate  domi- 
nante :  all  the  greatest  virtues  must  necessarily  lie  prostrate,  if 
pleasure  rules. 

Natura  duce,  errare  nullo  pacto  potest :  if  nature  is  our  guide, 
we  can  in  no  wise  go  wrong. 

Quid  igitur  hunc  paucorum  annorum  accessio  iuvare  potuisset  ? 
how  therefore  could  the  addition  of  a  few  years  have  helped  him 
(=if  a  few  years  had  been  added)  ? 

3.  By  sine  with  the  Ablative. 

Ex. — Nemo  sine  spe  vivere  posset :  no  one  could  live  without 
hope  (unless  he  had  hope). 

4.  By  an  Imperative  or  its  equivalent. 

Ex. — Tolle  hanc  opinionem,  luctum  sustuleris:  remove  (=if 
you  remove)  this  belief,  you  will  have  removed  sorrow. 

5.  By  an  independent  sentence. 

Ex. — Poscit,  dandum  est:  she  demands  (=if  she  demands), 
he  must  give. 

Tristis  es  ?  indignor  quod  sum  tibi  causa  doloris  :  are  you  sad  ? 
I  am  provoked  that  I  am  a  cause  of  pain  to  you. 

6.  By  a  temporal  sentence  with  cum. 

Ex. — Cum  poscis,  posce  Latine:  when  (=if)  you  ask,  ask  in 
Latin. 

Eem. — Note  the  use  of  nisi  following  a  negative  and  without 
a  verb. 

Ex. — Nihil  potest  evenire,  nisi  causa  antecedente :  nothing  can 
happen  unless  a  cause  precede. 

Labienus  iuravit  se,  nisi  victorem,  in  castra  non  reversurum : 
Labienus  swore  that  he  would  not  return  to  camp,  except  as  a 
victor. 

Omission  of  Protasis  and  Apodosis. 

116.  Either  member  (Protasis  or  Apodosis)  may  be  omitted, 
but  may  be  easily  gathered  from  the  context. 

Sometimes  an  Apodosis  is  stated  from  which  must  be  derived 
the  real  Apodosis  corresponding  to  the  Protasis  given. 


72  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Ex. — Occasio  egregie  rei  gerendag  fuit  (sc.  et  egregie  res  gesta 
esset),  si  Furius  protinus  de  via  ad  castra  oppugnanda  duxisset: 
there  was  an  opportunity  for  a  successful  engagement  (lit.,  for 
managing  the  affair  excellently),  [and  there  would  have  been 
a  successful  engagement]  had  Furius  forthwith  led  his  troops 
from  the  road  to  storm  the  camp. 

There  is  an  omission  of  the  Apodosis  in  Conditional  Sentences 
of  Comparison  introduced  by  ut  si,  ac  si,  quam  si,  quasi,  etc. :  "as 
if."  (See  132.) 

117.  Conditional  sentences  are  divided  into  three  classes, 
according  to  the  character  of  the  condition — (1)  Logical  or  In- 
dicative, (2)  Ideal  or  Potential,  (3)  Unreal  Conditions. 

118.  The  Logical  Condition  is  stated  positively,  indicatively. 
The  mood  is  the  Indicative,  as  a  rule,  in  both  members.     Any 
tense  may  be  used. 

1.  Si  hoc  dicis,  erras :   if  you  say  this,  you  make  a  mistake. 

2.  Si  hoc  dixisti,  erra(vi)sti:  if  you  (have)  said  this,  you  (have) 

made  a  mistake. 

3.  Si  hoc  dicebas,  errabas :  if  you  said  (=were  saying)  this,  you 

made  (=: were  making)  a  mistake. 

4.  Si  hoc  dices,  errabis:   if  you  say  (=shall  say)  this,  you  will 

make  a  mistake. 

5.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  erraveris :  if  you  shall  have  said  this,  you  will 

have  made  a  mistake. 

6.  Si  hoc  dicis,  errabis:   if  you  say  this  (now),  you  will  make  a 

mistake. 

7.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  errabis:   if  you  say  (shall  have  said)  this,  you 

will  make  a  mistake. 

8.  Si  hoc  dixisti,  erras :  if  you  say,  have  said  (=if  ever  you  say, 

have  said)  this,  you  make  a  mistake. 

9.  Si  hoc  dixeras,  errabas:   if  you  said,  had  said  (=if  ever  you 

said,  had  said)  this,  you  made  a  mistake. 
Kem. — The  actions  may  be  indefinitely  repeated,  or  iterative. 
(See  8  and  9.) 

NOTE  1.  In  0.  0.  after  a  present  leading  tense.    Dicit  te — 
1.  Si  hoc  dicas,  errare :  he  says  that  if  you  say  this,  you  are  mak- 
ing a  mistake. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  73 

2.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  erra(vi)sse:   he  says  that  if  you  (have)  said 

this,  you  (have)  made  a  mistake. 

3.  Si  hoc  diceres,  errasse:  he  says  that  if  you  said  (were  saying) 

this,  you  made  (=were  making)  a  mistake. 

4.  Si  hoc  dicas,  erraturum  esse:  he  says  that  if  you  say  (=shall 

say)  this,  you  will  make  a  mistake. 

5.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  erraturum  esse  (fore  ut  erraveris)  :    he  says 

that  if  you  shall  have  said  this,  you  will  have  made  a  mis- 
take. 

6.  Si  hoc  dicas,  erraturum  esse :  he  says  that  if  you  say  this,  you 

will  make  a  mistake. 

7.  Si   hoc   dixeris,  erraturum   esse :    he   says   that   if   you   say 

(=  shall  have  said)  this,  you  will  make  a  mistake. 

8.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  errare :  he  says  that  if  you  say,  have  said  (=if 

ever  you  say,  have  said)  this,  you  make  a  mistake. 

9.  Si  hoc  dixisses,  errasse:    he  says  that  if  you  said,  had  said 

(=if  ever  you  said,  had  said)  this,  you  made  a  mistake. 
NOTE  2.  0.  0.  after  a  past  leading  tense.    Eespondit  te — 

1.  Si  hoc  diceres,  errare:    he  replied  that  if  you  said  this,  you 

were  making  a  mistake. 

2.  Si  hoc  dixisses,  errasse :   he  replied  that  if  you  had  said  this, 

you  made  a  mistake. 

(Aorist)  dixisses  (dixeris),  errasse — if  you  had  said  (said), 
etc.,  you  made,  etc. 

3.  Si  hoc  diceres,  errasse :  he  replied  that  if  you  said  (were  say- 

ing, before)  this,  you  made  (were  making)  a  mistake. 

4.  Si  hoc  diceres,  erraturum  esse:    he  replied  that  if  you  said 

(should  say)  this,  you  would  make  a  mistake. 

5.  Si  hoc  dixisses,  erraturum  esse  (fore  ut  errasses)  :   he  replied 

that  if  you  should  have  said  this,  you  would  have  made  a 
mistake. 

6.  Si  hoc  diceres,  erraturum  esse:    he  replied  that  if  you  said 

this,  you  would  make  a  mistake. 

7.  Si  hoc  dixisses,  erraturum  esse :    he  replied  that  if  you  said 

(should  have  said)  this,  you  would  make  a  mistake. 

8.  Si  hoc  dixisses,  errare :   he  replied  that  if  you  said,  had  said 

(=if  ever  you  said,  had  said)  this,  you  made  a  mistake. 

9.  Si  hoc  dixisses,  errasse :   he  replied  that  if  you  said,  had  said 

(=if  ever  you  said,  had  said)  this,  you  made  a  mistake 
(in  time  gone  by). 


74  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Rem.  1.  Instead  of  bracketed  periphrases  of  Fut.  II.  given 
above  (fore  ut,  etc.),  it  is  best  to  use  the  other  form  and  let  the 
context  decide  the  exact  time. 

Bern.  2.  The  Apodosis  may  be  in  the  Subjunctive  if  it  is  (1) 
Potential,  (2)  Potential  Question,  (3)  Imperative  Subjunctive. 

Bern.  3.  The  Indefinite  (Ideal)  Second  Person  ("one,"  "we") 
requires  the  Subjunctive  always. 

Ex. — Memoria  minuitur,  nisi  earn  exerceas:  memory  wanes 
unless  you  (—"one,"  "we,"  etc.)  exercise  it. 

Examples  under  the  Logical  Condition — 

Si  spiritum  ducit,  vivit :  if  he  draws  his  breath,  he  is  living. 

Si  occidi,  recte  feci :  if  I  killed  him,  I  did  right. 

Naturam  si  sequemur  ducern,  nunquam  aberrabimus:  if  we 
follow  (shall  follow)  nature  as  a  leader,  we  will  never  go  wrong. 

Parvi  sunt  f oris  arma,  nisi  est  consilium  domi :  arms  are  of 
little  value  abroad,  unless  there  is  wisdom  at  home. 

Si  feceris  id  ...  magnam  habebo  gratiam:  if  you  do  (shall 
have  done)  this  ...  I  will  be  very  grateful. 

Stomachabatur  senex,  si  quid  asperius  dixeram:  the  old  man 
used  to  be  fretted,  if  I  said  (had  said)  anything  rather  (too) 
harsh. 

Si  pes  condoluit,  si  dens,  f  erre  non  possumus :  if  a  foot  hurts, 
if  a  tooth  aches  (has  become  painful),  we  cannot  endure  it. 

Si  Caius  absens  capitis  est  damnatus,  iudex  iniquus  f uit :  if 
Caius  was  condemned  to  death  in  his  absence,  the  judge  was 
unjust. 

Ideal  or  Potential  Conditional  Sentences. 

119.  The  mood,  when  the  sentence  is  regularly  formed,  is 
the  Subjunctive. 

The  tenses  are  the  Present  and  Perfect.    The  time  is  future. 

The  matter  is  still  in  suspense.  The  condition  is  more  or  less 
involved  in  fancy,  which  ranges  from  a  probability  to  an  impos- 
sibility. The  chance  for  realization  may  or  may  not  be  very  re- 
mote. 

Hence  we  often  have  a  mere  supposition,  a  fancy,  a  possibility. 

The  Present  is  translated  "were  to,"  or  "should."  The  Perfect 
is  translated  "should"  ("should  have"),  "should  prove  to" 
("should  prove  to  have"),  "should  turn  out  to"  ("should  turn 
out  to  have"),  "should  come  to,"  etc. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  75 

1.  Si  hoc  dicas,  erres :  if  you  should  (were  to)  say  this,  you  would 

make  a  mistake. 

2.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  erres :  if  you  should  have  said  this,  you  would 

make  a  mistake. 

3.  Si  hoc  dicas,  erraveris :  if  you  should  say  this,  you  would  have 

(would  prove  to  have,  etc.)  made  a  mistake. 

4.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  erraveris:    if  you  should  have  said  this,  you 

would  have  made  a  mistake. 
Eem. — Actions  may  be  iterative. 
NOTE  1.  0.  0.  after  a  present  leading  tense.  Dicit  te — 

1.  Si  hoc  dicas,  erraturum  esse :  he  says  that  if  you  should  (were 

to)  say  this,  you  would  make  a  mistake. 

2.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  erraturum  esse :  he  says  that  if  you  should  say 

(should  have  said,  were  to  have  said)   this,  you  would 
make  a  mistake. 

3.  Si  hoc  dicas,  erraturum  esse  (fore  ut  erraveris)  :  he  says  that 

if  you  should  say  this,  you  would  have  made  (would  prove 
to  have  made)  a  mistake. 

4.  Si  hoc  dixeris,  erraturum  esse  (fore  ut  erraveris)  :    he  says 

that  if  you  should  have  said  this,  you  would  have  made  a 
mistake. 
NOTE  2.   0.  0.  after  a  past  leading  tense.    Respondit  te — 

1.  Si  hoc  diceres,  erraturum  esse:  he  replied  that  if  you  should 

(were  to)  say  this,  you  would  make  a  mistake. 

2.  Si  hoc  dixisses,  erraturum  esse :   he  replied  that  if  you  should 

say  (= should  have  said)  this,  you  would  make  a  mistake. 

3.  Si  hoc  diceres,  erraturum  esse  (fore  ut  err  asses)  :   he  replied 

that  if  you  should  say  this,  you  would  have  made,  etc.,  a 
mistake. 

4.  Si  hoc  dixisses,  erraturum  esse  (fore  ut  errasses)  :  he  replied 

that  if  you  should  have  said  this,  you  would  have  made  a 
mistake. 

Rem. — The  Present  and  Perfect,  when  stated  in  a  past  0.  0. 
connection,  become  the  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  respectively. 
Do  not  confuse  with  unreal  relations,  which  also  employ  the  Im- 
perfect and  Pluperfect. 

Examples  under  the  Ideal  Condition — 

Si  hostes  veniant,  pro  libertate  pugnemus :  if  the  enemy  should 
come,  we  would  fight  for  (in  behalf  of)  liberty. 


76  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

Hanc  viam  si  asperam  esse  negem,  mentiar :  if  I  should  say 
that  this  way  is  not  rough,  I  should  lie. 

Si  senatus  id  decernat,  consul  magistratu  abeat :  if  the  senate 
should  (were  to)  decree  this,  the  consul  would  go  out  of  office. 

Si  quis  deus  dicat  .  .  .  nolint :  if  some  god  were  to  say,  etc., 
they  would  be  unwilling. 

Id  si  acciderit,  simus  armati :  if  this  were  to  happen,  we  would 
be  in  arms. 

Si  quid  ei  mali  ceciderit,  sperare  desinam :  if  any  misfortune 
should  have  befallen  him,  I  would  cease  to  hope. 

Si  gladium  quis  apud  te  sana  mente  deposuerit,  repetat  insan- 
iens,  reddere  peccatum  sit,  officium  non  reddere:  if  any  one  of 
sound  mind  were  to  deposit  (=to  have  deposited)  a  sword  with 
you,  and  should  reclaim  it  when  mad,  it  would  be  wrong  (=a 
sin)  to  return  it,  right  (=your  duty)  not  to  return  it. 

Ciceroni  nemo  ducentos  nunc  dederit  nummos  nisi  fulserit 
anulus  ingens :  nobody  would  give  Cicero  nowadays  two  hundred 
two-pences,  unless  a  huge  ring  glittered  (on  his  hand). 

120.  1.  Sometimes  the  sentence  or  passage  shifts  from  the 
Ideal  to  the  Unreal,  or  vice  versa. 

Ex. — Si  reviviscant  et  tecum  loquantur — quid  talibus  viris  re- 
sponderes  (instead  of  respondeas)  ?  if  they  should  come  to  life 
and  speak  with  you — what  answer  would  you  make  to  such  men  ? 

2.  Occasionally  in  0.  0.  the  context  alone  must  determine 
whether  the  condition  independently  stated  would  be  Logical  or 
Ideal. 

121.  An  Indicative  Apodosis  occurs  with  a  Subjunctive  Pro- 
tasis when  the  former  is  stated  as  a  fact. 

Ex. — Transire  Tiberim  et  intrare,  si  possim,  castra  hostium 
volo:  I  wish  to  cross  the  Tiber,  and,  if  possible  (if  I  should  be 
able)  enter  the  enemy's  camp. 

Neque,  aliter  si  f aciant,  ullam  inter  suos  habent  auctoritatem : 
and,  if  they  should  do  otherwise,  they  do  not  have  any  influence 
among  their  own  people. 

122.  When  the  Protasis  is  negative  (introduced  by  nisi  or  si 
non},  the  Indicative  non  possum.,  etc.,  is  used  regularly  in  the 
Apodosis,  rather  than  non  possim,  etc. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  77 

And  often  the  Indicative  of  posse,,  velle,  deb  ere  and  other  po- 
tential verbs,  as  well  as  with  adjective  and  substantive  predicates, 
is  used  instead  of  the  Subjunctive.  (See  126.) 

Ex. — Neque  iustitia  neque  amicitia  esse  omnino  poterunt,  nisi 
ipsae  per  se  expetantur:  neither  justice  nor  friendship  will  be 
able  to  exist  at  all,  unless  they  (should)  be  sought  after  for 
themselves. 

Xeque  amicitiam  tueri  possumus  nisi  seque  amicos  et  nosmet 
ipsos  diligamus :  and  we  cannot  preserve  friendship  unless  we 
love  our  friends  equally  as  (—as  much  as)  ourselves. 

Difficile,  longum,  supervacuum,  etc.,  est  narrare :  it  were  diffi- 
cult, tedious,  superfluous,  etc.,  to  tell. 

The  Unreal  Condition. 

12'3.  An  Unreal  Condition  is  impossible  of  fulfillment.  It 
may  be  stated  with  reference  to  the  present  or  past.  The  mood 
in  both  members  is  the  Subjunctive.  The  tenses  are  the  Imper- 
fect and  Pluperfect. 

Thus,  (1)  if  this  were  so  (but  it  is  not  so),  something  else 
would  be  so  (but  it  is  not) .  (2)  If  this  had  happened  (but  it  did 
not  happen),  something  else  would  have  happened  (but  it  did 
not). 

Ex. — Si  scirem,  dicerem :   if  I  knew,  I  would  say. 

Non  dixissem,  nisi  scissem:  I  would  not  have  said,  if  I  had 
not  known. 

Si  Hannibal  Scipionem  ad  Zamam  vicisset,  Carthago  non  de- 
leta  esset :  if  Hannibal  had  defeated  Scipio  at  Zama,  Carthage 
would  not  have  been  destroyed. 

Si  pedites  fiumen  transire  possent,  castellum  ex  itinere  oppug- 
narent :  if  the  infantry  could  cross  the  river,  they  would  storm 
the  fort  on  the  march. 

Hoc  non  dicerem,  nisi  tua  et  salutis  communis  nostrum  om- 
nium interesset :  I  would  not  say  this  if  it  did  not  concern  you 
and  the  common  welfare  of  us  all. 

XOTK  1.  Sometimes  the  Pluperfect  is  used  in  the  Protasis  with 
the  Imperfect  in  the  Apodosis.  On  the  other  hand,  an  Imperfect 
Protasis  occurs  with  a  Pluperfect  Apodosis,  when  the  Protasis  re- 
fers to  the  present,  or  is  true  of  the  present  as  well  as  the  past. 

Nisi  ante  Roma  prof  ectus  esses,  nunc  earn  certe  relinqueres :  if 


78  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

you  had  not  departed  from  Rome  before,  you  would  certainly 
leave  it  now. 

Memoriam  ipsam  cum  voce  perdidissemus,  si  tarn  in  nostra 
potestate  esset  oblivisci  quam  tacere:  we  should  have  lost  mem- 
ory itself  together  with  utterance,  if  it  were  as  much  in  our  power 
to  forget  as  to  keep  silent. 

Ego  nisi  peperissem,  Eoma  non  oppugnaretur ;  nisi  filium  hab- 
erem,  libera  in  libera  patria  mortua  essem:  had  I  not  become 
a  mother,  Borne  would  not  be  besieged ;  had  I  not  a  son,  I  should 
have  died  a  free  woman  in  a  free  land. 

XOTE  2.  The  Imperfect  occurs  frequently  in  the  Protasis,  less 
often  in  the  Apodosis,  rarely  in  both,  where  the  Pluperfect  might 
have  been  expected.  This  is  often  explained  as  opposition  to 
continuance  or  repetition  in  the  past. 

Ex. — Plus  apud  me  antiquorum  auctoritas  valet,  vel  nostrorum 
maiorum,  qui  mortuis  tarn  religiosa  iura  tribuerunt,  quod  non 
fecissent  profecto,  si  nihil  ad  eos  pertinere  arbitrarentur :  with 
me  the  opinion  of  the  ancients  has  more  weight,  or  of  our  ances- 
tors, who  observed  for  the  dead  such  pious  rites,  and  this  they 
certainly  would  not  have  done,  if  they  had  thought  that  nothing 
affected  them. 

XOTE  3.  An  unreal  relation  may  also  be  expressed  by  the  Po- 
tential of  the  Past,  i.  e.,  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

Ex. — Qui  videret,  urbem  captam  diceret:  whoso  had  seen  it, 
had  said  that  the  city  was  taken. 

NOTE  4.  The  Periphrastic  Active  occurs  in  the  Imperfect  and 
Pluperfect,  retaining  its  peculiar  sense. 

Ex. — Etiam  si  obtemperasset,  idem  eventurum  fuisset:  even 
if  he  had  obeyed,  the  same  thing  would  have  been  likely  to  occur. 

The  Indicative  Mood  in  Unreal  Conditions, 

124.  a-  An  Unreal  Present  Protasis  may  be  used  with  a  Pres- 
ent Indicative  Apodosis  stating  a  fact. 

Ex. — Si  mihi  nihil  aliud  praestares,  me  hoc  consolaris :  if  you 
offered  me  nothing  else,  you  console  me  in  this. 

1).  The  Pluperfect  Indicative  (sometimes  the  Aorist)  occurs  in 
the  Apodosis  of  an  Unreal  Past  Condition,  but  is  contradicted  by 
the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  Protasis.  The  Apodosis  in  this  case 
precedes. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  79 

Ex. — Praeclare  viceramus,  nisi  spoliatum,  inermem,  fugientem 
Lepidus  recepisset  Antonium :  we  had  gained  a  brilliant  victory, 
had  not  Antony  taken  in  Lepidus  when  impoverished,  defenceless 
and  fleeing. 

Occasio  egregie  rei  gerendse  fuit  si  Furius  duxisset :  there  was 
an  opportunity  for  a  splendid  exploit  (=and  so  there  would  have 
been)  if  Furius  had  led,  etc. 

Peractum  erat  bellum  si  Pompeium  Brundisii  opprimere  po- 
tuisset:  the  war  had  been  finished  if  he  could  have  overtaken 
Pompey  at  Brundusium. 

c.  The  Imperfect  Indicative  occurs  in  the  Apodosis  of  an  LTn- 
real  Past  Condition.  The  action  represented  by  the  Imperfect 
Indicative  is  going  on,  but  is  interrupted  or  cut  short  by  the 
LTnreal  Protasis.  The  Apodosis  precedes. 

Ex. — Cascina  circumveniebatur,  ni  prima  legio  se  opposuisset : 
Caecina  was  being  surrounded  (and  would  have  been),  had  not 
the  first  legion  placed  itself  in  the  way. 

Labebar  longius,  nisi  me  retinuissem :  I  was  letting  myself  go 
(was  gliding  on)  too  far,  had  I  not  checked  myself. 

Rem. — The  Imperfect  and  Pluperfect  Indicative  occur  in  the 
Protasis  too,  but  rarely. 

NOTE. — I.  If  the  above  sentences  (with  Indicative  Apodoses) 
be  transferred  to  0.  0.,  then  in  (a)  consolaris  becomes  Present 
form  of  Infinitive  (consolari). 

IT.  In  (b)  and  (c)  the  Imperfect  (Aorist)  and  Pluperfect  be- 
come the  Perfect  form  of  the  Infinitive,  whether  the  leading  verb 
of  saying,  thinking,  etc.,  be  present  or  past. 

ti%$~  Let  it  be  remembered  that  in  an  Unreal  Conditional  sen- 
tence a  Subjunctive  Protasis  is  never  changed  as  regards  mood  or 
tense.  There  may  be  changes  of  person,  pronouns  and  adverbs. 

Ex. — Dicit  (dixit)  Caecinam  circumventum  esse,  nisi  prima 
legio  se  opposuisset. 

Dicunt  (dixerunt)  se  praeclare  vicisse,  etc. 

125.  The  Imperfect  and  Aorist  Periphrastic  Active  Indica- 
tive are  sometimes  used  in  the  Apodosis  (rarely  the  Protasis)  of 
an  Unreal  Past  Condition  instead  of  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive. 

Ex. — Si  Cacus  agendo  armentum  in  speluncam  compulisset, 
ipsa  vestigia  quasrentem  dominum  eo  deductura  erant :  if  Cacus 


80  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

had  forced  the  herd  into  the  cave  by  driving  them,  the  very  tracks 
would  have  led  (lit.,  were  likely  to  lead)  their  master  thither 
seeking  them. 

Mazseus,  si  transeuntibus  flumen  Macedonibus  supervenisset, 
haud  dubie  oppressurus  fuit  incompositos :  if  Mazaeus  had  come 
upon  the  Macedonians  when  they  were  crossing  (trying  to  cross) 
the  river,  without  doubt  he  would  have  (was  likely  to,  etc.)  over- 
whelmed them  while  disordered. 

Quid  futurum  fuit,  si  plebs  agitari  ccepta  esset?  what  would 
have  been  the  result  if  the  plebs  had  begun  to  be  agitated  ? 

Eelicturi  agios  erant,  nisi  litteias  misisset :  they  were  about  to 
leave  their  lands  had  not  he  sent  a  letter. 

NOTE. — These  periphrastics,  when  transferred  to  0.  0.,  be- 
come -rus,  a,  um  fuisse,  whether  the  leading  verb  is  present  or 
past. 

Ex. — Dicit  (dixit)  si  Cacus  .  .  .  compulisset,  ipsa  vestigia — 
deductura  fuisse. 

126.  I.  In  case  of  an  Unreal  Present  Condition,  when  the  pre- 
dicate in  the  Apodosis  in  a  verb  denoting  ability.,  permission,  obli- 
gation, etc.  (posse,  licet,  necesse  est,  oportet,  debere,  convenit, 
decet,  etc.),  or  a  substantive  (fas,  nefas,  occasio,  periculum,  pec- 
catum  officium,  etc. — esse),  or  an  adjective  (par,  aequum,  ini- 
quum,  rectum,  iustum,  dignum,  pertinens,  praeclarum,  superb- 
urn,  deforme,  absurdum,  ridiculum,  decorum,  sequius,  melius, 
utilius,  facilius,  optabilius,  satius,  optimum,  etc. — esse),  or  the 
Future  Passive  Participle — then  the  Imperfect  Indicative  is 
used,  as  a  rule,  instead  of  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive.  The  Im- 
perfect Subjunctive,  however,  may  be  used,  and  is  good  Latin. 

Ex. — Etiam  si  nulla  spes  subesset,  tamen  necessitas  vos  stim- 
ulare  debebat  (deberet)  ut  vinceretis :  even  if  no  hope  were  pres- 
ent, nevertheless  necessity  ought  to  stimulate  you  to  conquer. 

Quid  enim  Heius  poterat  respondere,  si  esset  improbus?  for 
what  reply  could  Heius  make  if  he  were  not  upright  ? 

Quse  si  dubia  aut  procul  essent,  tamen  omnes  bonos  reipublicas 
consulere  decebat :  if  these  were  uncertain  or  remote,  yet  it  were 
(r=  would  be)  proper  for  all  patriotic  men  to  consult  the  interest 
of  the  state. 

Quod  si  setas  vacationem  non  daret,  tamen  aBquum  erat  me 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  81 

dimitti:  but  if  age  did  not  grant  me  exemption,  yet  it  were 
(would  be)  fair  for  me  to  be  discharged. 

Omnino  supervacua  erat  doctrina,  si  natura  sufficeret :  train- 
ing were  altogether  superfluous  if  nature  sufficed. 

Si  verum  respondere  velles,  hasc  dicenda  erant:  if  you  were 
willing  to  answer  the  truth,  this  would  have  to  be  said. 

Quod  si  Kom«  Cnaeus  Pompeius  privatus  esset  hoc  tempore, 
tamen  ad  tantum  bellum  is  erat  diligendus  atque  mittendus :  if 
however  Cnseus  Pompey  were  at  this  time  a  private  citizen  in 
Rome,  yet  he  ought  to  be  selected  and  despatched  to  so  important 
a  war. 

NOTE. — I.  The  Imperfect  Indicative  of  the  above  predicates  in 
an  Unreal  Present  Condition,  when  transferred  to  0.  0.  become 
the  Present  form  of  the  Infinitive  whether  the  leading  verb  be 
present  or  past.  Mood  and  tense  of  Protasis  unchanged. 

Ex. — Dicit  (dixit)  quaB  si  ...  essent,  tamen  omnes  bonos  rei- 
publicas  consulere  decere. 

Dicit  (dixit)  quid  enim  posse  Heium  respondere  (Ehetor. 
Ques.  71),  si  esset  improbus. 

II.  In  case  of  the  Unreal  Past  Condition  with  the  same  predi- 
cates above  given,  the  Imperfect  and  Aorist  (less  often  Pluper- 
fect) are  used  in  the  Apodosis  instead  of  the  Pluperfect  Subjunc- 
tive. The  latter  however  may  be  used. 

Ex. — Hostes  sustineri  non  poterant  ni  extraordinarias  cohortes 
se  obiecissent :  the  enemy  could  not  have  been  checked,  had  not 
extra  cohorts  hurled  themselves  against  them. 

Antoni  potuit  gladios  contemnere,  si  sic  omnia  dixisset:  he 
could  have  despised  the  swords  of  Antony,  if  he  had  said  every- 
thing so. 

Deleri  exercitus  potuit,  si  persecuti  victores  essent :  the  army 
could  have  been  destroyed,  had  the  victors  pursued. 

Si  morati  essetis,  moriendum  omnibus  f uit :  if  you  had  delayed 
all  must  have  perished. 

NOTE. — In  case  of  the  Unreal  Past  Condition,  the  Imperfect 
Aorist  (and  Pluperfect)  Indicative  of  the  above  predicates  be- 
come in  0.  0.  the  Perfect  form  of  the  Infinitive. 

Ex. — Dicit  (Dixit)  hostes  sustineri  non  potuisse,  ni  .  .  .  se 
obiecissent. 


82  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Pompeium  plerique  existimant,  si  acrius  insequi  voluisset,  bel- 
lum  eo  die  potuisse  finire :  most  people  think  that  if  Pompey  had 
determined  to  follow  up  more  energetically,,  he  could  have  fin- 
ished the  war  on  that  day.  (0.  E.  si  voluisset,  potuit.) 

127.  When  in  the  Unreal  Past  Condition,  the  Apodosis  is 
limited  by  paene  or  prope  (almost)  the  Aorist  Indicative  is  used. 

Ex. — Caesar  paene  ^Ethiopia  tenus  ^Egyptum  penetravit,  nisi 
exercitus  sequi  recusavisset :  Caesar  penetrated  Egypt  almost  as 
far  as  Ethiouia  had  not  (—but)  his  army  refused  to  follow. 
(0.  0.=rCaesarem  penetrasse — nisi,  etc.) 

Pons  Sublicius  iter  paene  hostibus  dedit,  ni  unus  vir  fuisset: 
the  Pons  Sublicius  (=pile  bridge)  well-nigh  gave  a  passage  to 
the  enemy,  had  it  not  been  for  one  man.  (0.  0.  Pontem  .  .  . 
dedisse,  ni,  etc. ) 

128.  Pure  Unreal  Condition   (i.   e.,   Subjunctive    in    both 
members)  in  0.  0. 

The  Protasis  of  course  is  never  changed. 

In  the  Apodosis  of  the  Unreal  Present  or  Past  Condition,  the 
Imperpffe  or  Pluperfect  Subjunctive  active  becomes  -rus,  a,  urn 
fuisse.  If  the  verb  is  passive  or  has  no  Future  Active  participle, 
then  use  futurum  fuisse  ut  -f-  Imperfect  Subjunctive.  Observe 
same  forms  for  both. 

Rem. — The  construction  may  be  varied  by  using  posse  or  velle 
in  Unreal  Present,  and  potuisse  or  voluisse  in  Unreal  Past. 

Examples  under  Unreal  Present — 

Si  hoc  crederes,  diceres — Dicit  (dixit)  te,  si  hoc  crederes,  dic- 
turum  fuisse :  he  says  (said)  that,  if  you  believed  this,  you  would 
say  it. 

Pater  proclamabat,  se  filiam  iure  csesam  iudicare ;  ni  ita  esset, 
patrio  iure  in  filium  animadversurum  fuisse :  the  father  declared 
that  he  considered  his  daughter  had  been  killed  in  justice ;  if  it 
were  not  so,  he  would  punish  his  son  by  a  father's  right. 

Scitote  socios  vestros  Parthis  tributum  pependisse  et  adhuc 
pensuros  fuisse,  si  a  me  cessatum  esset :  know  that  your  allies 
were  wont  to  pay  tribute  to  the  Parthians  and  would  still  be  pay- 
ing it,  if  remissness  had  been  shown  by  me. 

Num  putatis,  Patres  Conscripti,  apud  (ad)  vos  meam  causain 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  83 

me  acturum  fuisse,  nisi  timerem,  etc.  ?  do  you  think,  Conscript 
Fathers,  that  I  would  be  pleading  my  cause  before  you,  if  I  did 
not  fear,  etc.  ? 

Dicit  (dixit),  si  adesset,  futurum  fuisse  ut  puer  disceret;  or, 
puerum,  si  adesset,  discere  posse:  he  says  (said)  that  if  the  boy 
were  present,  he  would  learn;  or,  that  the  boy  could  learn  if  he 
were  present.  (Discere  has  no  Future  Active  participle.) 

Examples  under  Unreal  Past — 

Si  hoc  credidisses,  dixisses — Dicit  (dixit)  te,  si  hoc  credidisses, 
dicturum  fuisse:  he  says  "(said),  that  if  you  had  believed  this, 
you  would  have  said  it. 

Apparebat  ...  si  diutius  vixisset,  Hamilcare  duce  Poenos 
arma  Italic  inlaturos  fuisse :  it  was  evident,  that  if  he  had  lived 
longer,  the  Carthaginians  would  have  borne  arms  (made  war) 
against  Italy  under  the  leadership  of  Hamilcar. 

Nam  hoc  quidem  in  talibus  viris  quid  attinet  dicere,  si  con- 
tendisset,  (eum)  impetraturum  non  fuisse?  for  what  does  it 
signify,  to  be  sure,  in  the  case  of  such  men,  to  say  that  if  he  had 
tried,  he  would  not  have  obtained  his  request  ? 

Quid  arbitramur  (eos)  in  vera  fuisse  facturos?  what  do  we 
suppose  they  would  have  done  in  a  real  case? 

Puer,  si  affuisset,  didicisset — Dicit  (dixit),  si  affuisset,  futu- 
rum fuisse  ut  puer  disceret ;  or,  puerum,  si  affuisset,  discere  po- 
tuisse :  he  says  (said)  that,  if  the  boy  had  been  present,  he  would 
have  learned ;  or,  that  the  boy  could  have  learned  if  he  had  been 
present. 

Nisi  eo  ipso  tempore  nuntii  de  Caasaris  victoria  essent  allati, 
existimabant  plerique  futurum  fuisse  ut  oppidum  amitteretur: 
had  not  tidings  of  Ca?sar's  victory  been  brought  at  that  very 
time,  most  people  thought  that  the  town  would  have  been  lost. 

Kem.  1.  The  Apodosis  of  an  Unreal  Past  condition  is  some- 
times expressed  by  the  Perfect  form  of  the  Infinitive  in  0.  0., 
but  this  belongs  to  what  has  already  been  said  of  Indicative 
tenses  in  Unreal  conditions. 

Ex. — Agricola  solebat  narrare  se  in  prima  iuventa  studium 
philosophise  acrius  hausisse,  ni  prudentia  matris  incensum  ac 
flagrantem  animum  coercuisset :  Agricola  used  to  relate  that  in 
his  early  youth,  he  had  (  =  would  have)  drunk  in  too  zealously 


84  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

the  study  of  philosophy,  if  his  mother's  prudence  had  not  re- 
strained his  eager  and  ardent  mind. 

Eem.  2.  In  the  form  -TUB,  a,  urn  fuisse,  fuisse  is  sometimes 
omitted. 

Subjunctive  Dependency  (Dependent  Conditions). 

129.  A.  When  an  Unreal  Present  Condition  is  dependently 
stated  in  an.  indirect  question,  or  after  quin,  ut,  etc.,  then  no 
change  whatever  is  made  in  either  member,  whether  the  verbs  are 
active  or  passive,  or  whether  the  leading  verb  is  present  or  past. 

Ex. — Non  dubito  (or,  dubitabam)  quin,  si  modo  esset  in  re- 
publica  senatus,  statua  P.  Sextio  in  foro  statueretur:  I  do  not 
doubt  (I  did  not  doubt)  that  if  only  there  were  a  senate  in  the 
commonwealth,  a  statue  would  be  erected  in  the  forum  to  Publius 
Sextius. 

B.  If,  however,  the  predicate  in  the  Apodosis  denotes  ability, 
obligation,  etc. — a  potential  verb — (as,  posse,  debere,  etc.,  see 
1J36),  or  if  it  is  an  adjective,  etc.,  etc.,  then  an  Imperfect  Indica- 
tive becomes  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive.  No  other  change. 

Ex. — Honestum  tale  est  ut,  vel  si  ignorarent  id,  sua  tamen 
pulchritudine  esset  laudabile :  virtue  is  such  a  thing  that,  even  if 
men  were  ignorant  of  it,  it  would  nevertheless  be  praiseworthy  by 
reason  of  its  beauty. 

ISO.  A.  When  the  Unreal  Past  condition  is  dependently 
stated,  as  above,  the  Protasis  remains  unchanged.  The  verb  in 
the  Apodosis,  if  passive,  is  also  unchanged  and  remains  in  the 
Pluperfect  Subjunctive.  But  if  the  verb  in  the  Apodosis  be 
active,  it  is  expressed  by  -rus,  a,  urn  fuerim,  etc.  (Aorist  Sub- 
junctive Periphrastic  Active). 

The  form  -rus,  a,  um  fuissem,  etc.,  rarely  occurs,  and  then 
chiefly  in  the  indirect  question. 

Ex. — Nee  dubium  erat  quin,  si  tarn  pauci  simul  obire  omnia 
possent,  terga  daturi  hostes  f uerint :  and  there  was  no  doubt  that, 
if  so  few  had  been  able  to  manage  everything  at  the  same  time, 
the  enemy  would  have  turned  their  backs. 

Adeo  inopia  coactus  est  Hannibal,  ut  nisi  turn  fugae  speciem 
abeundo  timuisset,  Galliam  repetiturus  fuerit :  Hannibal  was  so 
pressed  by  want  (of  provisions)  that,  if  he  had  not  then  feared 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  85 

the  appearance  of  flight  by  retreating,  he  would  have  gone  back 
to  Gaul. 

Ea  res  tantum  tumultum  ac  fugam  prsebuit  ut,  nisi  castra 
extra  urbem  f  uissent,  effusura  se  omnis  pavida  multitudo  f uerit : 
that  affair  caused  so  much  tumult  and  flight  that  if  the  camp 
had  not  been  outside  the  city,  the  whole  panic-stricken  multitude 
would  have  poured  forth. 

Die  quidnam  facturus  fueris,  si  eo  tempore  censor  fuisses :  tell 
me  what  you  would  have  done  if  you  had  been  censor  at  that  time. 

Sequitur  ut,  si  hoc  audivisset,  non  venturus  f  uerit :  it  follows 
that  he  would  not  have  come,  if  he  had  heard  this. 

BUT  NOTE. — Id  ille  si  repudiasset,  dubitatis  quin  ei  vis  esset 
allata?  if  he  had  rejected  that,  do  you  doubt  that  force  would 
have  been  brought  to  bear  on  him  (used  against  him)  ? 

Rem. — If  the  verb  has  no  Future  Active  participle,  then  po- 
tuerim  or  voluerim,  etc.  (Aorist  Subjunctive)  with  the  Infinitive 
may  often  be  used  as  a  substitute. 

B.  If  the  verb  in  the  Apodosis  of  an  Unreal  Past  condition  de- 
notes ability,  obligation,  etc.  (see  126), then  the  Aorist  Subjunc- 
tive is  used,  not  the  Periphrastic  form. 

Ex. — Haud  dubium  fuit  quin,  nisi  ea  mora  intervenisset,  cas- 
tra eo  die  Punica  capi  potuerint :  there  was  no  doubt  that,  if  that 
delay  had  not  intervened,  the  Punic  camp  could  have  been  taken 
that  day. 

In  eos  versa  peditum  acies  haud  dubium  fecit,  quin,  nisi  firm- 
ata  extrema  agminis  f  uissent,  ingens  in  eo  saltu  accipienda  clades 
f  uerit :  the  line  of  infantry  turned  against  them  rendered  it  not 
doubtful  that,  had  not  the  rear  of  the  column  been  supported,  a 
great  disaster  must  have  been  received  in  that  pass. 

131.  If  upon  either  member  of  an  Unreal  Present  Conditional 
sentence  another  Subjunctive  depend,  though  its  time  be  really 
present  or  future,  it  is  attracted  into  the  sphere  of  the  Unreal 
Present,  and  must  be  expressed  by  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive. 

Ex. — Quis  esset  tantus  fructus  in  prosperis  rebus,  nisi  haberes 
qui  illis  aeque  ac  tu  gauderet?  what  so  great  advantage  would 
there  be  in  prosperity,  unless  you  had  some  one  to  take  pleasure 
in  it  as  well  as  yourself? 


86  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

132.  Conditional  Sentences  of  Comparison,  introduced  by  ac 
si,  quasi,  velut  (si),  tamquam  (si),  etc.,  follow  the  ordinary  rules 
of  sequence  rather  than  the  conditional  usage. 

Ex. — Hie  est  obstandum,  milites,  velut  si  ante  Romana  mrenia 
pugnemus :  here  we  must  oppose  them,  soldiers,  as  if  we  were 
fighting  before  the  walls  of  Eome. 

Tarn  te  diligit  quam  si  vixerit  tecum :  he  esteems  you  as  much 
as  if  he  had  lived  with  you. 

Rem. — This  rule  is  occasionally  violated  and  the  sentence  fol- 
lows the  law  of  conditions. 

The  Calendar. 

133.  Dates  in  Latin  were  computed  backwards  from  three 
date-points.    These  were  the  Calends,  or  Kalenciae,  which  fell  on 
the  1st  of  the  month;  the  Nones,  or  Nonas,  which  fell  on  the  5th; 
and  the  Ides,  or  Idus,  which  fell  on  the  13th.     However,  in 
March,  May,  July,  and  October,  the  Nones  and  Ides  fell  on  the 
7th  and  loth  respectively. 

The  name  of  the  month  was  always  associated  with  the  date- 
point  as  an  adjective.  The  date  was  always  reckoned  as  such  a 
day  before  a  following  date-point. 

To  Reduce  an  English  Date  to  Latin. 

134.  If  the  date  falls  on  Calends,  Nones  or  Ides,  express  by 
the  Ablative. 

Ex. — January  1st:  Kalendis  Januariis  (Kal.  Jan.).  March 
7th:  Nonis  Martiis  (Non.  Mart.).  November  13th:  Idibus  No- 
vembribus  (Id.  Novembr.). 

The  day  before  a  certain  date-point  is  written  pridie  -f-  Accusa- 
tive of  date-point.  Ex. — March  31st:  pridie  Kalendas  Apriles 
(prid.  Kal.  Apr.).  February  4th:  pridie  Nonas  Februarias 
(prid.  Non.  Febr.).  March  14th:  pridie  Idus  Martias  (pr.  Id. 
Mart.). 

To  find  a  date  reckoning  back  from  the  Calends,  add  two  days 
to  the  current  month  and  subtract  the  given  date.  Thus,  Decem- 
ber 28th — 31+2=33.  33 — 28=5.  Hence,  ante  diem  quintum 
Kalendas  Januarias  (a.  d.  V.  Kal.  Jan.),  or  quinto  die  ante 
Kalendas  Januarias  (V.  Kal.  Jan.). 

To  find  a  date  reckoning  back  from  the  Nones  or  Ides,  add  one 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  87 

day  to  the  date  on  which  the  Nones  or  Ides  fall  and  subtract  the 
given  date.  Thus,  March  10th— 15 +1  =  16.  16—10=6.  Hence, 
ante  diem  sextum  Idus  Martias  (a.  d.  VI.  Id.  Mart.),  or  sexto 
die  ante  Idus  Martias  (VI.  Id.  Mart.).  December  3d — 5+1=6. 
6 — 3=3.  Hence,  ante  diem  tertium  Nonas  Decembres  (a.  d. 
III.  Non.  Decembr.),  or  tertio  die  ante  Nonas  Decembres  (III. 
Non.  Decembr.). 

NOTE  1.  Of  the  two  forms  given  in  the  above  examples,  the 
former  (i.  e.f  the  long  form)  is  more  usual. 

NOTE  2.  It  is  worthy  of  notice  that  the  long  form  (ante  diem, 
etc.)  and  pridie  +  its  date  were  treated  as  single  expressions  and 
occur  in  the  position  of  Nominative,  Accusative  and  Ablative 
cases,  and  also  with  the  prepositions  ad,  ex,  and  in. 

NOTE  3.  Prid.  Kal.  Jan.,  etc.,  is  sometimes  written  a.  d.  II. 
Kal.  Jan.,  or  II.  Kal.  Jan. 

In  leap-year,  February  may  be  regarded  as  having  29  days  only 
up  to  the  intercalated  day  which  was  directly  after  the  25th 
counting  backward  from  the  1st  of  March.  The  intercalated  day 
(which  was  really  the  24th)  was  not  counted,  but  the  25th  was 
repeated.  Ex.— February  25th— 29+2=31.  31—25=6.  Hence, 
a.  d.  VI.  Kal.  Mart,  priorem.  February  24th  (the  extra  day)  : 
a.  d.  VI.  Kal.  Mart,  posteriorem,  or  a.  d.  bissextum  Kal.  Mart. 
But  February  23d— 28X2=30.  30—23=7.  Hence,  a.  d.  VII. 
Kal.  Mart. 

To  Reduce  a  Latin  Date  to  English. 

135.  From  what  has  been  said  it  is  easy  to  find  the  corres- 
ponding English  date  when  in  Latin  it  falls  on  a  date-point,  or 
on  the  day  before  a  date-point.  Ex. — Kalendis  Martiis :  March 
1st.  Pridie  Nonas  Octobres :  October  6th. 

If  the  date  falls  between  the  Ides  and  Calends,  add  two  days  to 
the  current  month  and  subtract  the  given  date.  Ex. — a.  d. 
XIV.  Kal.  Febr.— 31+2=33.  33—14=19.  Hence,  January 
19th. 

If  the  date  falls  between  the  Calends  and  Nones,  or  between 
the  Nones  and  Ides  add  one  day  to  the  date  on  which  the  None- 
or  Ides  fall  and  subtract  the  given  date.  Ex. — a.  d.  V.  Id.  Sep- 
tember.—13 -f  1=14.  14—5=9.  Hence  September  9th.  III. 
Non.  Mart.— 7+1=8.  8—3=5.  Hence,  March  5th. 


88  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

In  dating  letters  always  date  from  a  certain  place.  Rules 
under  Ablative  of  Whence  Relation  apply  here. 

Ex. — Nonis  Martiis,  Roma:    Rome,  March  7th. 

VIII.  Id.  Jun.  Cularone  ex  finibus  Allobrogum :  Cularo,  in  the 
territory  of  the  Allobroges,  June  6th. 

Names  of  Months, — January=Ianuarius,  February =Febru- 
arius,  March=Martius,  April ^Aprilis,  May=Maius,  June= 
lunius,  July^Quintilis  (lulius),  August =Sextilis  (Augustus), 
September^  September,  October =. October,  Novembers  Novem- 
ber, December=December. 


THE  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE. 

136.  The  Ablative  Absolute  is  an  independent,  explanatory 
phrase,  having  a  subject  and  predicate,  so  to  speak,  both  in  the 
Ablative.  The  subject  is  a  noun  or  pronoun ;  the  predicate  is  a 
participle,  adjective,  or  substantive.  The  translations  are  varied 
and  must  depend  upon  the  sense  to  be  conveyed.  The  phrase  may 
be  coordinated  with  the  sentence  in  which  it  is  used  and  be  con- 
nected with  it  by  and;  or  it  may  be  made  subordinate  and  trans- 
lated by  a  clause  beginning  with  because,  as,  since,  when,  al- 
though, if,  after,  etc.  When  the  predicate  is  an  adjective  or  sub- 
stantive, some  form  of  the  verb  "to  be"  may  be  used  in  the  trans- 
lation. 

Ex. — rCaesare  mortuo :  Caesar  being  dead ;  on  the  death  of 
Caesar;  because,  when,  although,  after,  etc.,  Caesar  was  dead. 

Sole  orto :  the  sun  having  risen ;  after  sun-rise ;  as,  since, 
when,  after,  etc.,  the  sun  had  risen. 

Xerxe  regnante :  in  the  reign  of  Xerxes ;  as,  when,  while,  etc., 
Xerxes  was  reigning. 

Hannibale  duce:  Hannibal  being  leader;  under  the  leader- 
ship of  Hannibal ;  as,  though,  when,  etc.,  Hannibal  was  leader. 

L.  Domitio  et  App.  Claudio  consulibus :  in  the  consulship  of 
Lucius  Domitius  and  Appius  Claudius;  when,  while  Domitius 
and  Claudius  were  consuls. 

His  rebus  cognitts  (auditis)  :  upon  learning  (hearing)  these 
things;  having  learned  (heard)  these  things;  when,  after,  etc., 
he  had  learned  (heard)  these  things. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  89 

Marcus,  abolla  rapta,  properavit:  Marcus  snatched  up  his 
cloak  and  hurried  on. 

Zeuxis  flagitavit  ut,  remoto  linteo,  picturam  ostenderet :  Zeuxis 
demanded  that  he  should  remove  the  cloth  and  show  the  picture. 

Neque  convenit  quibus  consulibus  mortuus  sit:  and  it  is  not 
agreed  in  whose  consulship  he  died. 

NOTE. — The  subject  of  the  Ablative  Absolute  pharse  should  not 
be  identical  with  any  noun  or  pronoun  already  occurring  in  the 
sentence.  The  sentence,  "Manlius,  having  slain  the  Gaul,  stripped 
him  of  his  necklace,"  we  must  write  thus,  "Manlius  caesum  Gal- 
lum  torque  spoliavit ;"  not  like  this,  "Manlius,  COBSO  Gallo,  eum 
torque  spoliavit/' 

PARTICIPLES. 

137.  The  Latin  participle  is  used  with  great  freedom  and 
may  be  translated  in  various  ways.    The  time  depends  upon  the 
sentence  in  which  it  is  used. 

The  so-called  Present  Participle  may  represent  a  Present,  Im- 
perfect, or  Future  tense;  while  the  Perfect  Participle  often  rep- 
resents a  Perfect,  Aorist,  Pluperfect  or  Second  Future  (= Future 
Perfect). 

Present. — Aves  ad  silvam  volantes  videmus. 
Imperfect. — Nostri  hostes  flumen  transeuntes  (crossing,  trying 

to  cross)  aggressi  sunt. 
Future. — Te  ex  urbe  redeuntem  videbo. 

Perfect. — Milites  capti  (who  have  been  captured)  liberabuntur. 
Aorist. — Milites  eo  die  vulnerati  (who  were  wounded  on  that 

day)  domos  redeunt. 

Pluperfect. — Urbs  capta  (which  had  been  taken)  deleta  est. 
Future  Perfect. — Urbs  capta  (when  it  shall  have  been  taken)  de- 

lebitur. 

138.  1.    The  participle  may  be  made  coordinate  with  the 
leading  verb  and  connected  with  it  by  and. 

Ex. — Consul  prof ectus  in  Asiam  rediit :  the  consul  set  out  and 
returned  to  Asia. 

Hostes  victi  fugerunt :  the  enemy  were  defeated  and  fled. 

Consul  civibus  in  forUm  convocatis  nuntiavit :  the  consul  sum- 
moned the  citizens  into  the  forum  and  announced  to  them,  etc. 


90  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

2.  Again,  it  may  be  subordinated  and  treated  as  a  clause  be- 
ginning with  who,  when,  while,  as,  since,  if,  although,  after,  etc., 
to  suit  the  sense. 

Ex. — Verum  dicentibus  facile  cedimus:  we  readily  yield  to 
those  who  speak  the  truth. 

Timeo  Danaos  et  dona  ferentes:  I  fear  the  Greeks  even  when 
they  bring  presents. 

Voluptate  dominante:  as,  since,  if,  because,  while  pleasure 
reigns. 

Carthago  capta  deleta  est :  after  Carthage  had  been  taken,  it 
was  destroyed  (or,  Carthage  was  taken  and  destroyed). 

Scipio  Numantiam  captam  delevit:  when  Scipio  had  taken 
Numantia,  he  destroyed  it  (or,  Scipio  took  Numantia  and  de- 
stroyed it). 

3.  Note  especially  the  present  form  of  the  participle  denoting 
attempted  action. 

Ex. — Gustos  captivum  ex  urbe  evadentem  cepit:  the  guard 
seized  the  prisoner  when  he  was  trying  to  escape  from  the  city. 

Obstitit  intranti  miratrix  turba  parumper :  a  wondering  crowd 
blocked  his  way  for  a  little  while  as  he  was  trying  to  enter. 

4.  Sundry  examples  of  classical  uses:    Sicilia   Sardiniaque 
amissaa :  the  loss  of  Sicily  and  Sardinia. 

Ante  (post)  urbem  conditam :  before  (after)  the  founding  of 
the  city. 

Ab  urbe  condita :  from  (after,  since)  the  founding  of  the  city. 

Ante  (post)  Christum  natum:  before  (after)  the  birth  of 
Christ. 

Recuperatas  provincial  gloria:  the  glory  of  having  recovered 
the  province. 

Caesare  interfecto  respublica  est  turbata:  by  the  killing  (as- 
sassination) of  Csesar  the  state  was  thrown  into  confusion. 

Dextra  data  fidem  futurae  amicitias  sanxit:  he  pledged  his 
promise  of  future  friendship  by  giving  his  right  hand. 

Absens  accusatus  est :   he  was  accused  in  his  absence. 

Flentes  a  Caesare  petierunt :  they  besought  Caesar  with  tears. 

Eidens  dicebat :   he  used  to  say  jestingly. 

Rent. — It  must  be  observed  that  the  adjective,  too,  may  often 
be  translated  in  many  of  the  ways  suggested  above  by  supplying  a 
proper  tense  of  the  verb  "to  be." 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  91 

Future  Active  and  Future  Passive  Participles. 

139.  1.  The  Future  Active  Participle  (-rus,  a,  um)  is  trans- 
lated going  to,  about  to,  likely  to,  intending  to,  etc. 

The  Future  Passive  Participle  (-dus,  a,  um)  is  translated  be  to, 
have  to,  ought  to,  worthy  to,  must  or  should.  The  idea  of  obliga- 
tion, necessity,  or  duty  always  clings  to  this  participle. 

Do  not  suppose  that  these  participles  are  corresponding  forms 
in  different  voices.  The  Future  Active  Participle  has  no  corres- 
ponding form  in  the  passive  voice,  neither  has  the  Future  Passive 
Participle  any  corresponding  form  in  the  active  voice.  Of  course 
the  above  remarks  on  participles  apply  to  these  also. 

Ex. — Regulus  Carthaginem  rediturus  precibus  amicorum  non 
cessit:  when  (although)  Regulus  was  about  to  return  to  Car- 
thage, he  did  not  yield  to  the  entreaties  of  his  friends. 

Ave,  Caesar,  morituri  te  salutant:  farewell,  Caesar,  those  who 
are  about  to  die  salute  thee. 

Tiberius,  imperator  timendus,  turn  regnabat:  Tiberius,  an 
emperor  to  be  dreaded,  was  then  reigning. 

2.  These  participles  with  forms  of  the  verb  esse  have  complete 
conjugations.     The  Future  Active  Participle  with  esse  is  called 
the  First  Periphrastic,  or  Periphrastic  Active  Conjugation;   the 
Future  Passive  Participle  with  esse  is  called  the  Second  Peri- 
phrastic, or  Periphrastic  Passive  Conjugation. 

The  First  Periphrastic  is  substituted  in  the  passive  verb  by 
futurum  est,  etc.,  ut  -f  Subjunctive,  or  by  in  eo  est  (it  is  on  the 
point  of  )  ut  -j-  Subjunctive.  Both  phrases  are  impersonal. 

Ex. — In  eo  est  ut  urbs  capiatur :  the  city  is  on  the  point  of  be- 
ing taken. 

Non  dubito  quin  futurum  sit  ut  urbs  capiatur :  I  do  not  doubt 
that  the  city  is  going  to  be  (will  be)  taken. 

3.  The  agent  (the  person  upon  whom  the  obligation  rests)  of 
the  Future  Passive  Participle  is  put  in  the  Dative.    When,  how- 
ever, the  verb  takes  a  Dative  object,  the  Ablative  with  a  (ab)  is 
used,  but  not  unless  there  would  be  real  ambiguity. 

If  there  is  no  definite  subject  expressed,  or  if  the  verb  from 
which  the  participle  is  derived  is  intransitive,  then  we  must  ex- 
press 'impersonally. 

The  agent  is  not  seldom  translated  as  the  subject. 


92  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

Ex. — Csesari  omnia  uno  tempore  erant  agenda:  everything 
had  to  be  done  by  Caesar  (or,  Caesar  had  to  do  everything)  at  one 
time  (or,  Cassar  had  everything  to  do  at  once). 

Mihi  epistola  scribenda  est :  I  must  write  a  letter. 

Omnibus  moriendum  est :  all  must  die. 

140.  The  Future  Passive  Participle  in  the  Nominative  or  Ac- 
cusative  (agreeing  with  subject  or  object)   is  frequently  used 
with  verbs  meaning  to  give,  to  commit,  to  entrust,  to  send,  to 
leave,  to  receive,  to  undertake,  etc.,  as  dare,  traders,  mandare, 
relinquere,  accipere,  suscipere,  sumere,  curare,  locare,  etc. 

Ex. — Dux  militibus  urbem  diripiendam  dedit :  the  general  has 
given  up  the  city  to  the  soldiers  to  plunder  (to  be  plundered,  for 
plunder) . 

Pueri  a  pastore  uxori  educandi  sunt  dati :  the  boys  were  given 
by  the  shepherd  to  his  wife  to  be  brought  up. 

Caesar  pontem  in  numine  faciendum  curavit :  Caesar  had  a 
bridge  built  over  the  river. 

141.  1.  With  verbs  of  perception,  conception  and  representa- 
tion the  Present  form  of  the  participle  is  used  to  show  the  object 
in  its  present  action  or  state   (=present  to  time  of  principal 
verb). 

Ex. — Audivi  te  dicentem:   I  heard  you  say  (saying),  etc. 

Vidi  puellam  in  horto  ambulantem :  I  saw  the  girl  walking  in 
the  garden. 

2.  The  Perfect  Participle  represents  the  action  complete. 

Ex. — Catonem  vidi  in  bibliotheca  sedentem  multis  Stoicorum 
circumfusum  libris :  I  saw  Cato  sitting  in  his  library  surrounded 
by  many  books  of  the  Stoics. 

As  there  is  no  Present  Participle  Passive,  the  Accusative  with 
the  Present  Infinitive  Passive  is  used  instead. 

Ex. — Puerum  puniri  vidi:  I  saw  the  boy  punished  (=being 
punished). 

Isocratem  Plato  laudari  fecit  a  Socrate :  Plato  has  represented 
Isocrates  as  being  praised  by  Socrates. 

Hem. — Even  in  the  active  the  Present  Infinitive  is  sometimes 
used. 

Hos,  quos  video  volitare  in  foro,  quos  stare  ad  curiam,  quos 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  93 

etiam  in  senatum  venire :  these  whom  I  see  flitting  about  in  the 
forum,  standing  by  the  senate-house,  and  even  coming  into  the 
senate. 

WITHOUT. 

142.  The  English  term  "without"  may  be  expressed  in  many 
ways. 

1.  By  sine  with  a  substantive. 

Ex. — Sine  molestia,  without  trouble. 

2.  By  a  negative  adjective  or  participle  after  an  affirmative 
statement. 

Ex. — Hamilcarem  sui  cives  inauditum  damnarunt :  his  own 
fellow  citizens  condemned  Hamilcar  without  a  hearing. 

Plus  hodie  boni  feci  imprudens  quam,  etc. :  I  have  done  more 
good  to-day  without  knowing  it  than,  etc. 

Hostes  inopinantes  adorti  sumus :  we  attacked  the  enemy  with- 
out their  expecting  it. 

Te  non  sentientem  speculabuntur  atque  custodient :  they  will 
watch  and  guard  you  without  your  perceiving  it. 

Nullo  meo  merito :  without  any  merit  of  mine. 

Multi  mentiuntur  ignari :  many  lie  without  knowing  it. 

So  also  the  Ablative  Absolute — 

Ex. — Me  insciente :   without  my  knowledge. 

Caesare  invito :   without  Caesar's  consent. 

3.  By  qui  non,  quin,  or  ut  non  after  a  negative  sentence. 

Ex. — Quis  navigavit  qui  non  (=quin)  se  mortis  periculo 
committeret?  who  has  sailed  (upon  the  sea)  without  exposing 
himself  to  the  danger  of  death  ? 

Apelles  nullum  diem  intermisit  quin  exerceret  artem :  Apelles 
did  not  let  a  day  pass  without  practicing  his  art. 

Octavianus  nunquam  filios  suos  populo  commendavit  ut  non 
adiceret — si  merebuntur:  Octavianus  never  recommended  his 
sons  to  the  people  without  adding  (=that  he  did  not  add),  "if 
they  shall  be  worthy." 

4.  By  ut  non  after  an  affirmative  sentence. 

Ex. — Potest  esse  bellum  ut  tumultus  non  sit :  there  can  be  war 
without  there  being  tumult. 

5.  By  neque  (nee)  after  an  affirmative  sentence. 

Ex. — Legit  neque  intelligit :  he  reads  without  understanding. 


94  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

6.  By  nisi  after  a  negative  sentence. 

Ex. — Non  redibo  nisi  eum  videro :  I  will  not  return  without 
seeing  him. 

7.  By  cum  with  a  negative. 

Ex. — Discessit  cum  nihil  cognovisset:  he  departed  without 
having  found  out  anything  (=:although,  etc.). 

Non  Quod,  Quia,  Quo— Sed  Quod,  Quia. 

148.  Non  quod,  non  quia,  non  quo — sed  quod,  sed  quia :  "not 
because — but  because."  In  the  first  clause  the  Subjunctive  is  the 
rule,  because  the  reason  offered  is  only  imagined,  and  hence  re- 
jected; in  the  second  the  Indicative  is  used  (unless  some  outside 
influence  calls  for  the  Subjunctive)  because  it  contains  the  real 
reason. 

If  the  first  clause  contains  an  accepted  fact,  the  Indicative  is 
used;  but  the  reason  offered  is  generally  fanciful.,  imagined  or 
conceived,  hence  Subjunctive  is  far  more  common. 

The  Subjunctive  is  always  used  with  non  quo. 

If  another  negative  is  added  to  the  first  clause — non  quod  non, 
non  quia  non,  non  quo  non  (=non  quin)    :"not  because  not"- 
the  Subjunctive  must  always  be  used. 

Ex. — Pugiles  in  iactandis  csestibus  ingemiscunt,  non  quod 
doleant,  sed  quod  profundenda  voce  omne  corpus  intenditur  ven- 
itque  plaga  vehementior:  boxers  in  plying  the  cestus  heave 
groans,  not  because  (as  you  might  suppose)  they  are  in  pain,  but 
because  in  giving  full  vent  to  the  voice  all  the  body  is  put  to  the 
stretch  and  the  blow  comes  with  a  greater  rush. 

Example  of  Indicative. — Sum  non  dicam  miser,  sed  certe  exer- 
citus,  non  quia  multis  debeo,  sed  quia  saepe  concurrunt  aliquorum 
bene  de  me  meritorum  inter  ipsos  contentiones :  I  am,  I  will  not 
say  wretched,  but  certainly  worried,  not  because  I  am  in  debt  to 
many  (as  I  am),  but  because  the  rival  claims  of  many  who  have 
deserved  well  of  me  often  conflict. 

Rem. — The  Subjunctive  may  appear  in  the  second  clause  by 
reason  of  an  Ideal  Second  Person,  a  potential  idea,  or  0.  0. ;  but 
these  influences  are  entirely  external  to  the  rule  and  may  alter 
any  construction. 

A  final  sentence  often  occurs  in  the  second  clause — sed  ut,  etc. 

NOTE. — Observe  also  m.agis  quod,  quia — quam  quo,  quod,  quia: 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  95 

"more  because — than  because."  Here  the  order  of  moods  is  re- 
versed— Indicative  in  first,  Subjunctive  in  second.  Magis  ut 
(more  in  order  to)  also  occurs  in  first,  with  Subjunctive  of 
course. 

Iterative  or  Repeated  Actions. 

144.  The  mood  is  the  Indicative,  as  a  rule,  both  in  the  prin- 
cipal and  in  the  subordinate  clause. 

Various  conjunctions  are  used  to  introduce  the  subordinate 
clause,  as  si,  ubi,  ut,  cum,,  quoties,  cum  primum,  simul  ac,  the 
relative,  etc. 

1.  When  the  actions  of  the  leading  and  subordinate  verbs  are 
iterative  and  contemporaneous,  the  same  tense  occurs  in  both 
members,  as  follows : 

Subordinate  Clause.  Principal  Clause. 

Present,  Present, 

Imperfect,  Imperfect. 

First  Future,  First  Future. 

2.  When  both  actions  are  iterative,  and  the  subordinate  is  ante- 
cedent, then  the  following  tenses  are  used : 

Subordinate  Clause.  Principal  Clause. 

Perfect,  Present. 

Pluperfect,  Imperfect. 

Second  Future,  First  Future. 

Examples  under  1. — Cum  tacent,  clamant:  when  (ever)  they 
are  silent,  they  cry  out. 

Ubi  frumento  opus  erat,  cohortes  presidium  agitabant :  when 
there  was  need  of  corn,  the  cohorts  would  serve  as  (form)  an  es- 
cort. 

Dum  ego  legam,  scribes:  while  I  am  reading,  you  will  be 
writing. 

Examples  under  2. — Quod  non  dedit  fortuna,  non  eripit :  what 
fortune  does  not  give  (=has  not  given),  she  does  not  take  away. 

Stomachabatur  senex,  si  quid  asperius  dixeram:  the  old  man 
used  to  be  fretted,  if  I  said  anything  rather  harsh. 

Qui  timere  desierint,  odisse  incipient :  those  who  cease  to  fear 
will  begin  to  hate. 

Quoties  cecidit,  surgit :  as  often  as  he  falls  he  rises. 


96  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Quoties  ceciderat,  surgebat :  as  often  as  he  fell,  he  rose. 
Quoties  ceciderit,  surget:   as  often  as  he  falls,  he  will  rise. 

Rem.  1.  The  Subjunctive  sometimes  occurs  in  the  subordinate 
clause  (frequently  in  Livy),  and  is  explained  on  the  ground  of 
indefinite  repetition. 

Ex. — Id  ubi  dixisset,  hastam  in  fines  eorum  emittebat :  when 
he  had  said  that,  he  would  hurl  a  spear  into  their  territory. 

Rem.  2.  Notice  from  the  examples  above  that  the  English  does 
not  always  give  the  Latin  equivalent.  In  translating  English 
into  Latin  the  exact  tense  to  be  used  must  be  inferred  from  the 
nature  of  the  sentence. 

Postquam,  Ubi,  Cum  Primum,  Etc. — Tenses. 

145.  Postquam  (after),  ubi,  ut  (when),  cum  primum,  ubi 
primum,  ut  primum,  simulac  (as  soon  as),  etc.,  generally  ta£e 
the  Aorist  Indicative  or  Historical  Present  instead  of  the  Pluper- 
fect, though  the  translation  is  often  Pluperfect. 

Ex. — Caesar  ubi  venit :   when  Csesar  had  come. 

Postquam  pervenit :   after  he  had  arrived. 

Postquam  (often  written  as  two  words),  depending  on  a  defi- 
nite interval  of  time  expressed,  must  have  the  Pluperfect. 

Ex. — Hannibal  anno  tertio,  postquam  domo  profugerat,  in 
Africam  venit:  Hannibal  came  to  Africa  three  years  (in  the 
third  year)  after  he  had  fled  from  home. 

Aristides  decessit  fere  post  annum  quartum  (annum  post  quar- 
tum,  anno  quarto  post,  anno  post  quarto)'  quam  Themistocles 
Athenis  erat  expulsus:  Aristides  died  about  four  years  after 
Themistocles  had  been  banished  from  Athens. 

Rem. — The  particle  post  is  sometimes  omitted.  Ante,  how- 
ever, is  never  omitted  in  case  of  antequam  (ante — quam),  nor 
prius  in  priusquam  (prius — quam). 


ODD  NOTES  AND  IDIOMS. 

146.  Quid  (because),  quod  (because,  in  that,  the  fact  that, 
etc.),  quoniam  (since,  as),  quamquam  (although,  yet)  take  the 
Indicative,  except  in  0.  0.  (total  or  partial;  see  109  and  foil.) 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  97 

147.  After  a  Present  or  Future  leading  tense  a  past  Sub- 
junctive or  Infinitive  relation  is  expressed  by  the  Perfect  form  of 
the  Subjunctive  or  Infinitive,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Ex. — Nemo  dubitat  quin  Troia  dolo  capta  sit :  no  one  doubts 
that  Troy  was  taken  by  treachery. 

Inter  omnes  constat  Troiam  dolo  captam  esse :  all  agree  that 
Troy  was  taken  by  treachery. 

148.  The  Historical  Present  substitutes  the  Aorist.     It  is 
translated  either  as  a  Present  or  as  an  Aorist,  according  to  the 
context. 

149.  The  Historical  Infinitive  (= Present  form)  substitutes 
the  Imperfect.    It  is  used  in  rapid  narrative. 

150.  Dum  (=  while)  with  the  Present  substitutes  the  Im- 
perfect. 

Ex. — Dum  haec  Eomae  geruntur :  while  these  things  were  being 
conducted  at  Rome. 

151.  Antequam  and  priusquam  (=before)  must  not  be  used 
with  the  First  Future  Indicative  nor  the  Pluperfect  Indicative. 
Instead  of  the  Future  use  Present  or  Second  Future ;  instead  of 
the  Pluperfect  use  the  Aorist. 

Sequence  After  the  Perfect. 

152.  After  the  Perfect  tense,  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is 
more  usual  than  the  Present  in  a  present  or  future  connection. 

Ex. — Quoniam  expertus  sum  quam  essent  inania,  etc. :  since 
I  have  experienced  how  empty  are  the  things,  etc. 

Senatus  decrevit  ut  consules  duas  Gallias  sortirentur,  delectus 
haberetur,  vacationes  ne  valerent,  legati  cum  auctoritate  mitter- 
entur,  qui  adirent  Galliae  civitates  darentque  operam  ne  eae  se 
cum  Helvetiis  coniungerent :  the  senate  has  decreed  that  the 
consuls  shall  choose  the  two  Gauls  by  lot,  that  a  levy  shall  be 
held,  that  exemptions  from  military  service  shall  not  avail,  that 
ambassadors  having  authority  be  sent  to  consult  the  states  of 
Gaul  and  take  pains  that  they  do  not  unite  with  the  Helvetians. 

153.  1.  The  Present  tense  is  used  with  iam,  iam  diu,  iam  du- 
dum  and  iam  pridem  to  express  what  has  been  and  still  is  (con- 


98  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

tinned  from  past  into  the  present).     Translate  by  Progressive 
Perfect  generally. 

Ex. — Quod  te  iam  dudum  hortor:  as  (which)  I  have  now  for 
some  time  been  urging  you. 

Quae  iam  pridem  vast  are  studes:  which  you  have  long  been 
desiring  to  ruin. 

Annum  iam  tertium  et  vicesimum  regnat :    he  has  now  been 
reigning  twenty-three  years. 

2.  The  Imperfect  tense  with  the  same  particles  expresses  what 
had  been  and  still  was  (continued  from  a  remote  past  into  time 
of  Imperfect).  Translate  by  Progressive  Pluperfect,  as  a  rule. 

Ex. — Iam  dudum  flebam :   I  had  been  weeping  a  long  time. 

Qui  bellum  iam  pridem  parabat :  who  had  long  been  preparing 
for  war. 

Domicilium  Romae  multos  iam  annos  habebat :  he  had  had  his 
abode  at  Rome  now  for  many  years. 

154.  After  the  past  tenses  of  debeo,  oportet,  possum,  etc.,  the 
Present  Infinitive  should  be  used  where  in  English  we  say  ought 
to  have,  could  have,  etc. 

Ex. — Volumnia  debuit  in  te  officiosior  esse,  et  id  ipsum  quod 
fecit,  potuit  diligentius  facere:  Volumnia  ought  to  have  been 
more  attentive  to  you,  and  even  what  she  did,  she  could  have 
done  more  carefully. 

Ad  mortem  te,  Catilina,  duci  iussu  consulis  iam  pridem  oport- 
ebat :  Catiline,  you  ought  to  have  been  led  to  death  long  since 
by  order  of  the  consul. 

New  Grammar,  254,  R.  1.    Old  Grammar,  246,  R.  1. 

155 .  In  epistolary  composition  we  see  that  the  First  Future 
Indicative  (scribam)  becomes  the  Imperfect  Perphrastic  Active 
(scripturus  eram).     Now  the  Second  Future  Indicative  (scrip- 
sero)   becomes  the  Pluperfect  Subjunctive   (scripsissem).     See 
Peters'  Syntax  of  the  Latin  Verb. 

Ex. — Litteras  eram  daturus  postridie  ei  qui  mihi  primus  obvi- 
am  venisset :  I  will  give  the  letter  to-morrow  to  the  first  man 
that  comes  my  way. 

156.  Oportet  and  necesse  est  are  followed  by  the  Accusative 
and  Infinitive,  or  by  the  Subjunctive  without  ut.    So,  too,  licet. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  99 

Ex. — Oportet,  (necesse  est)  eum  venire :  it  is  necessary  for  him 
to  come;  he  must,  ought  to  come. 

Oportet  (necesse  est)  veniat :  it  is  necessary  that  he  come,  that 
he  shall  come,  etc.,  etc. 

Restrictive  Clauses. 

157.  Quod  sciam,  intellegam,  meminerim,  etc. :   as  far  as  I 
know,  remember,  etc. 

Quod  quidem  senserim:    so  far  as  I  was  aware. 
Quos  quidem  cognoverim :   so  far  as  I  know  them. 
But,  quod  potes,  poteris,  potero:    as  far  as  you  can,  I  can. 
And  always,  quod  ad  me  attinet  (pertinet)  :   as  far  as  I  am 
concerned. 

Regularly,  quantum  (or,  quoad)  scio,  intellego,  possum,  etc. 
Note  phrase,  quoad  eius  f acere  possum :  as  far  as  possible. 

Intransitive  Verbs  in  Passive. 

158.  Verbs  which  do  not  take  an  Accusative  case  as  direct 
object  in  the  active  must  be  used  impersonally  in  passive. 

If  a  Dative  object  occurs  in  active,  it  is  retained  in  passive. 
(See  40,  Kern.). 

Ex. — Mihi  persuadet :  he  persuades  me. 

Mihi  ab  eo  persuadetur :   I  am  persuaded  by  him. 

Rem. — The  impersonal  form  of  a  participle  or  an  adjective  is 
neuter.  (See  No.  98.) 

Pronouns  and  Adjectives. 

159.  Ipse:  "he  himself,"  "he  too,"  "he  on  his  part/7  "he  in 
person,"  "he  of  his  own  accord" ;  also  translated  "very,"  "even," 
"precisely,"  "just." 

Ex. — Ad  ipsas  portas :  to  the  very  gates. 

Ad  id  ipsum  creatus :   elected  for  just  that  purpose. 

160.  The  reflexive  sui,  sibi,  etc.,  may  refer  to  the  subject  of 
the  principal  or  subordinate  sentence. 

It  refers  to  the  principal  subject  in  Infinitive  sentences  (=  Ac- 
cusative and  Infinitive),  indirect  questions,  sentences  of  Design, 
and  dependent  clauses  in  0.  0. 

But  in  Consecutive  (Eesult,  etc.)  sentences  reference  is  made 


100  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

to  the  leading  subject  by  is,  unless  the  two  subjects  are  the  same. 
(See  Grammar,  309,  520-521,  and  remarks.) 

161 .  The  Latin  Relative  Pronoun  may  often  be  translated  by 
a  demonstrative  (this,  that,  etc.),  or  personal  (he,  she,  it,  they, 
etc.)  pronoun;   or  by  and,  but,  for,  if,  since,  etc.,  with  the  dem- 
onstrative or  personal  pronoun. 

This  is  resolving  the  relative. 

Ex. — Quae  cum  it  a  sint :   since  these  things  are  so. 

Quern  ego  miser  si  incolumem  relinquo:  for  if  I,  wretched 
man,  leave  him  safe. 

Quod  cum  fecisset :  when  he  had  done  this. 

NOTE. — It  sometimes  happens  that  two  relative  pronouns  oc- 
cur in  the  same  clause;  in  that  case  one  must  be  resolved  in 
translation. 

162.  Compound  or  General  Relatives  are  used  with  the  In- 
dicative in  Latin.    In  English  the  Subjunctive  or  its  equivalent  is 
more  frequent. 

Ex. — Quisquis  est :   whoever  he  is,  be,  may  be. 

So,  quicunque,  quotquot,  qualiscunque,  quotiescunque. 

" So-called,"  etc. 

163.  "So-called/'  "above  mentioned,"  "just  named,"  "here- 
after mentioned,"  etc.,  are  expressed  by  the  relative  with  a  finite 
verb,  not  by  a  participle  as  with  us. 

Ex. — Altitudo  animi,  quse  dicitur  (or,  quam  dicimus,  or  quam 
dicunt)  :  the  so-called  loftiness  of  soul. 

Philosophi  illi,  quos  modo  nominavi :  those  philosophers  just 
named  (whom  I  have  just  named). 

Una  cum  eo  quern  proxime  nominavi :  together  with  the  last 
one  mentioned  (—the  one  whom  I  have  last  mentioned). 

Illi,  qui  f eruntur,  labores  tui :   those  so-called  labors  of  yours. 

164.  Quis,  qua,  quid( adjective  qui,  quae  or  qua,  quod)"some 
one,"  "any  one"  are  used  instead  of  aliquis,  aliqua,  aliquid  (ad- 
jectives aliqui,  uliqua,  aliquod)  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  num,  and  in  rel- 
ative sentences,  unless  special  emphasis  or  contrast  is  intended. 

Ex. — Si  quis,  si  quid :  if  any  one,  if  anything. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  101 

This  of,  That  of,  These  of,  Those  of. 

165.  The  demonstrative  this,  that,  etc.,  should  not  be  ex- 
pressed with  a  following  Genitive  except  for  special  emphasis. 
A  preposition  may  even  be  used  referring  to  the  demonstrative 
understood.     However,  it  is  perfectly  allowable  to  repeat  the 
noun  already  stated,  or  use  another  of  like  meaning. 

Ex. — Nostrae  classes  et  Carthaginiensium,  or  nostras  classes 
et  classes  Carthaginiensium :  our  fleets  and  those  of  the  Cartha- 
ginians. 

In  Tuberonis :  in  that  of  Tubero. 

Quas  in  nostris  rebus  non  satis  honeste,  in  amicorum  fiunt  hon- 
estissime :  things  which  in  our  own  affairs  are  not  quite  proper  to 
do,  in  those  of  our  friends  most  proper. 

Multi  aut  propter  victories  cupiditatem  aut  propter  glorias 
vulnera  exceperunt:  many  have  received  wounds  either  on  ac- 
count of  the  desire  of  victory  or  [that  of]  renown. 

Nemo  and  Nihil. 

166.  For  lacking  cases  (Genitive  and  Ablative)  of  nemo,  use 
nullius  (hominis)  and  nullo  (homine). 

For  lacking  cases  (all  except  Nominative  and  Accusative)  of 
niln.il,  use  nulla  res. 

Uterque  and  Quisque. 

167.  Uterque:    each  of  two.     Quisque:    each  of  more  than 
two. 

Uterque  (each,  both)  is  used  with  the  Partitive  Genitive  of  a 
pronoun. 

Uterque  with  a  noun  agrees  with  it  in  the  singular. 
Ex. — Uterque  nostrum,  horum:  each  (both)  of  us,  of  these. 
Uterque  consul :  each  consul,  both  consuls. 
Quisque  militum:  each  (every)  one  of  the  soldiers. 

168.  Uterque,  uter  and  neuter  are  used  in  the  plural  of 
parties,  sets,  or  classes,  or  with  nouns  used  in  plural  only. 

Ex. — Utrique :  both  parties.    Utraque  castra :   both  camps. 

Mille  and  Milia. 

169.  Mille   (singular)   is  an  indeclinable  adjective.     Milia 
(plural)  is  a  neuter  substantive  always  used  with  the  Genitive. 

Ex. — Mille  equites.    But,  tria  milia  equitum. 


102  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

170.  Unus,  ullus,  nullus,  totus,  solus,  alius,  uter,  alter,  neu- 
ter, and  uterque  have  -ius  in  Genitive,  and  -i  in  Dative  of  all 
genders. 

Gen. — alius,  nullius,  utriusque. 
Dat. — alii,  nulli,  utrique. 

171.  The  same  as  is  generally  expressed  by  idem  followed  by 
the  relative  qui,  etc.    Idem  is  used  in  a  similar  sense  with  ut,  at- 
que  (ac),  ut,  cum  +  Ablative,  quam  si,  quasi.,  and  poetically  with 
the  Dative. 

Ex. — Servi  moribus  iisdem  erant  quibus  dominus :  the  ser- 
vants had  the  same  character  as  the  master. 

Equidem  posse  vellem  idem  gloriari  quod  Cyrus :  for  my  part 
I  would  that  I  were  able  to  make  the  same  boast  as  Cyrus. 

172.  Multus  with  another  adjective  is  commonly  connected 
with  it  by  a  conjunction. 

Ex. — Multi  et  graves  dolores :   many  heavy  sorrows. 
Multse  bonaeque  artes :   many  good  qualities. 
The  conjunction  is  not  infrequently  omitted. 
Ex. — Multi  clarissimi  viri :   many  most  illustrious  men. 
And  always,  multi  boni;  multi  improbi :  many  good  men; 
many  bad  men. 

173.  1.  Adjectives  of  inclination  and  disinclination,  knowl- 
edge and  ignorance,  order  and  position,  time  and  season  are  fre- 
quently used  where  an  adverb  might  be  expected.     Kenderings, 
however,  are  numerous.     (Old  Grammar,  324,  E.  6.    New  Gram- 
mar, 325,  E.  6.) 

Ex. — Primus  vidit :  he  was  the  first  to  see,  he  saw  first. 

Illi  robur  et  aes  triplex  circa  pectus  erat,  qui  fragilem  truci 
commisit  pelago  ratem  primus:  he  had  oak  and  triple  brass 
about  his  breast,  who  first  trusted  his  frail  bark  to  the  cruel  sea. 

Hoc  sciens  f eci :   I  did  this  knowingly. 

Lseti  venerunt :  they  came  gladly,  they  were  glad  to  come. 

Ego  eum  a  me  invitissimus  dimisi :  I  dismissed  him  most  un- 
willingly. 

Homines  qui  se  totos  tradiderunt  voluptatibus :  men  who  have 
given  themselves  over  (up)  entirely  to  pleasures. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  103 

Barus  venit  in  cenacula  miles :  the  soldiery  rarely  comes  into 
garrets. 

Qui  prior  strinxerit  f  errum,  eius  victoria  erit :  whoever  first 
draws  the  sword,  his  shall  be  the  victory. 

2.  Note  also  the  adjectives  summus,  medius,  primus,  extremus, 
ultimus,  imus,  infimus,  reliquus,  ceterus,  etc.,  in  a  partitive  sense. 

Summus  mons :   the  top  of  the  mountain. 

In  f oro  medio :  in  the  middle  of  the  forum. 

Eeliqua  (cetera)  Gra3cia:  the  rest  of  Greece. 

Beliqui  Belga?:   the  rest  of  the  Belgians. 

Primo  vere :  in  the  beginning  of  the  spring. 

In  extremo  ponte  turrim  constituit :  at  the  end  of  the  bridge 
he  erected  a  tower. 

Ad  extremas  fossas  castella  constituit:  at  the  ends  of  the 
trenches  he  erected  forts. 

Ab  infima  ara:   from  the  bottom  (lowest  part)  of  the  altar. 

Ad  imam  quercum :  at  the  foot  of  the  oak. 

3.  Frequens    (frequentior,  frequentissimus)  :    in  crowds,  in 
great  numbers,  crowded,  full. 

Ex. — Mane  Germani  frequentes  ad  eum  in  castra  venerunt: 
early  in  the  morning  the  Germans  in  great  numbers  came  to  him 
at  the  camp. 

Hue  postero  die  quam  f requentissimi  conveniunt :  hither  they 
assemble  on  the  next  day  in  as  great  numbers  as  possible. 

Frequens  convivium :  a  crowded  banquet. 

4.  Confertus  (confertior,  confertissimus)  in  military  language 
means  "in  close  array." 

Ex. — Hostes  confertissimi  incedebant:  the  enemy  were  ad- 
vancing in  very  close  array. 

5.  Armatus,  a,  um :  in  (under)  arms. 
Dirutus,  a,  um:   in  ruins. 

174.  Eeliquum,  am,  um  -|-  facere:  to  leave  behind,  to  leave 
remaining. 

Aliquid  reliqui  (Genitive  of  noun  reliquum)  facere — has  same 
meaning,  and  besides  sometimes  signifies  to  leave  undone,  to 
omit,  neglect. 


104  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Order  of  Certain  Words. 

175.  1.  Nam,  namque,  etenim,  itaque,  sed,  verum,  sin,  at, 
and  the  relative  qui,  etc.,  should  stand  first  in  the  sentence  or 
clause  which  they  introduce. 

Enim,  vero,  autem,  and  generally  igitur,  are  postpositive,  tak- 
ing second  or  third  place  in  sentence. 

2.  Quoque,  quidem,  -que,  and  -ve  always  stand  after  the  words 
they  emphasize  or  to  which  they  refer. 

Etiam  generally  precedes. 

3.  Ne — quidem  (="not  even")  bestrides  the  emphatic  word 
or  words. 

4.  Always  write  populus  Romanus,  senatus  populusque  Ro- 
manus, civis  Romania,  tribunus  plebis,  senatus  consultum,  res 
militaris,  res  gesta,  ins  civile,  via  Sacra,  patres  conscripti.     Do 
not  reverse. 

5.  Quisque  follows  a  superlative,  a  reflexive,  and  an  ordinal 
numeral. 

Ex. — Optimus  quisque :  all  the  best  men,  or  every  truly  good 
man. 

Ipse  se  quisque  diligit,  quod  sibi  quisque  carus  est :  every  one 
loves  himself,  because  every  one  is  dear  to  himself. 

lustitia  suum  cuique  distribuit :  justice  gives  to  each  one  his 
own. 

Tertio.quoque  anno:    every  third  year. 

Rule  for  the  Comparative. 

176.  A  comparative  adjective  or  adverb  takes  quam  with 
the  case  required  by  the  construction,  or  the  Ablative  without 
quam.     But  the  Ablative  occurs  only  when  the  Nominative  or 
Accusative  would  be  used  with  quam. 

Ex. — Terra  minor  est  quam  sol,  or  sole :  the  earth  is  smaller 
than  the  sun. 

Nihil  est  virtute  amabilius :  nothing  is  more  lovable  than 
virtue. 

Aurum  magis  (plus)  amat  quam  patriam,  or  patria:  he  loves 
gold  more  than  his  country. 

Ei  f  acilius  persuadetur  quam  filio :  he  is  more  easily  persuaded 
than  his  son. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  105 

Eem.  1.  Avoid  the  Ablative  if  ambiguity  would  arise. 

Eem.  2.  On  the  other  hand,  the  Ablative  is  the  only  construc- 
tion in  a  negative  relative  sentence. 

Ex. — Cato,  quo  erat  nemo  sapientior:  Cato,  than  whom  no 
one  was  wiser. 

NOTE. — In  an  expression  like  this,  Braver  than  prudent,  write, 
Fortis  magis  quam  prudens,  or  fortior  quam  prudentior. 

177.  "The — the"  in  correlative  comparative  sentences  is  ex- 
pressed by  quo — eo,  or  quanta — tanto.    Other  expressions  occur : 
quo — hoc,   quo — tanto,   quanta — eo,   quantum — eo,   quantum — 
tanto. 

The  first  two  pairs  are  used  everywhere;  the  last  two  should 
be  avoided. 

Ex. — Quo  citius,  eo  melius :  the  sooner,  the  better. 

178.  Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  vescor  and  their  compounds 
take  the  Ablative,  not  the  Accusative. 

179.  Modus  (manner,  or  measure)  with  an  adjective  or  Gen- 
itive, is  used  in  the  Ablative,  or  in  the  Accusative  with  ad  or  in. 

Ex. — Hoc  modo,  ad  hunc  modum,  or  in  hunc  modum:  in, 
after,  according  to,  this  manner. 

Servilem  in  modum,  or  servorum  modo:  after  the  manner 
of  slaves. 

Humano  modo,  or  humanum  in  (ad)  modum:  after  the  man- 
ner of  men. 

Quern  ad  modum,  or  quo  modo :  in  what  manner,  how. 

Sundry  Expressions  of  Time, 

180.  1.  Ante  (post)  decem  dies.     J 

Decem  ante  (post)  dies. 

,.  ,  ,x      }•  Ten  davs  before  or  after. 

Decem  diebus  ante  (post). 

Decem  ante  (post)  diebus.  j 

Eem. — Instead  of  decem,  the  ordinal  decimus  may  be  used 
agreeing  with  dies  in  the  singular. 

Ex. — Ante  (post)  decimum  diem,  etc.,  etc. 

2.  Abhinc  decem  dies.  \ 

Abhinc  decem  diebus  (not  so  good).  \  Ten  days  ago. 

Ante  with  Ace.  or  Abl.  (see  above).  ) 


106  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 


3.  Ad  decera  dies. 


[  Ten  days  hence. 
Te).    >  J 


Post  with  Ace.  or  Abl.  (see  above) 

181.  Aesalienum:  debt. 

^Es  alienum  suscipere,  contrahere,  f  acere,  solvere,  persolvere : 
to  incur,  to  contract,  to  make,  to  pay  a  debt. 

In  aere  alieno  esse :  to  be  in  debt. 

In  aes  alienum  incidere :  to  fall  into  debt. 

Aliquem  sere  alieno  liberare  (exsolvere)  :  to  free  or  relieve  any 
one  from  debt. 

Ex  sere  alieno  laborare,  or  aere  alieno  opprimi  (premi)  :  to  be 
oppressed,  overwhelmed  (pressed)  with  debt. 

^Ere  alieno  exire :  to  get  out  of  debt. 

Quanto  asre  alieno  !  how  deeply  in  debt !  (Desc.  Abl.,  Cic.  Cat. 
II.-2.) 

Qui,  magno  in  asre  alieno,  etc. :   who  though  greatly  in  debt. 

In  aere  meo:   in  my  debt.    (Cic.,  Cat.  II.— 7.) 

182.  1.  Mutuas  pecunias  ab  aliquo  sumere :    to  borrow  or 
raise  money  from  some  one. 

2.  Pecunias  credere,  commodare:   to  lend  money. 

183.  Supplicum  de  aliquo  sumere :  to  inflict  punishment  on 
somebody.     (Compare  aliquem  poena,  or  supplicio — afficere.    See 
39.)      Poenas  (pcenam)  sufferre,  solvere,  persolvere,  luere,  sus- 
cipere,  dare,  etc. :    to  suffer  punishment,  or  pay  the  penalty. 
(Compare  pcena,  etc.,  affici,  see  39.) 

Pcenas  ab  aliquo  petere  or  repetere :  to  demand  or  seek  satis- 
faction, or  revenge,  from  any  one. 

Rem. — Res  repetere:  to  demand  or  seek  satisfaction,  or  res- 
titution. 

184.  Fidem  dare ;  servare,  conserv are,  praest are,  liberare,  ex- 
solvere ;   violare,  f allere,  f rangere :   to  give ;   to  keep,  to  fulfill ; 
to  break — a  promise,  or  faith. 

In  fide  esse,  stare,  manere :  to  be,  to  remain  in  the  confidence 
of. 

Summam  fidem  omnium  rerum  alicui  habere :  to  have  the 
greatest  confidence  in  any  one  in  all  things.  (Note  Gen.  and 
Dat.) 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  107 

In  fidem  aliquem  recipere :  to  receive  any  one  under  protec- 
tion. 

Aliquem  in  fidem  tradere  or  permittere :  to  entrust  any  one  to 
the  protection  of  so  and  so. 

185.  Legem  ferre  or  rogare:   to  propose  or  introduce  a  bill 
or  law. 

Legem  perf erre :   to  carry  through,  to  pass  a  law. 
Legem  promulgare:   to  publish  a  law. 

186.  (1)   lus   (or  sententiam)   dicere:    to  pronounce  judg- 
ment. 

(2)  Causam  agere,  or  dicere:   to  plead  one's  cause. 

(3)  Diem  alicui  dicere:  to  appoint  a  day  for  any  one. 

(4)  Ita,  sic,  talia,  hsec — dicere  or  loqui :  to  speak  as  follows. 

(5)  Multa  (verba),  or  multis  verbis  dicere :  to  speak  at  length, 
fully. 

Note  also,  pauca  (verba),  or  paucis  verbis  respondere :  to  reply 
briefly,  or  make  a  brief  reply. 

187.  1.  Apud,  Ad,  and  Pro.— "Before,"  "in  the  presence  of"  : 
apvd  (ad). 

Ex. — Causam  apud  senatum,  iudicem,  populum — dicere:  to 
plead  one's  cause  before  the  senate,  judge,  or  people. 

2.  Apud  also  means  "at  the  house  of,"  "in  the  opinion  of," 
"with,"  "among."    Compare  the  French  chez. 

Ex. — Apud  me :   at  my  house. 

Apud  Graecos  mos  est:    it  is  customary  with   (among)   the 
Greeks. 
Apud  honestos :   in  the  opinion  of  honest  men. 

3.  "At,"  "near,"  "before"  in  military  operations  is  ad  or  apud. 
Pugna  ad  (apud)  Trebiam:  the  battle  near  (on,  of)  the  Trebia. 

4.  Pro  may  mean  "on  the  front  part  of,"  as  well  as  "before" 
"in  front  of."    Ex. — Pro  rostris :  on  the  front  part  of  the  rostra. 

188.  1.  Agmen:  a  line  or  column  of  march. 
Primum  agmen :   the  van,  the  vanguard. 
Novissimum  (extremum)  agmen:  the  rear. 

2.  Acies:  a  line-of -battle. 

Prima  acies:    the  van,  or  first  line. 


108  HAND-BOOK  or  LATIN  NOTES. 

IsTovissima  acies :  the  rear,  the  hindmost  line. 
Acie  (in  acie)  dimicare :   to  fight  in  open  battle. 
Aciem  instmere :  to  draw  up,  to  form  a  line-of-battle. 
In  aciem  ducere,  educere,  producere :  to  lead  troops  into  line- 
of-battle,  or  to  battle. 

189.  (1)  Proelium  committere  cum  +  Ablative:   to  join,  to 
engage  in,  battle  with  or  against. 

(2)  Cum  Hannibal  confligere:  to  engage  with  Hannibal. 

(3)  Proelio  (pugna)  contendere,  dimicare,  decertare,  certare — 
cum  aliquo :  to  fight  or  contend  in  battle  with  or  against  any  one. 

Cum  hostibus  (in  hostes)  pugnare :  to  fight  against  the  enemy. 
But,  contra  patriam  pugnare. 

Proelio,  pugna,  acie — excedere:  to  retire,  or  withdraw  from 
battle. 

Proelio  vincere  (superare)  :  to  conquer  (to  overcome)  in  battle. 

190.  Bellum  inferre  (facere)  +  Dative:   to  make  war  upon 
or  against. 

Bellum  indicere  -j-  Dative :  to  declare  war  upon  or  against. 

Bellum  trahere,  ducere :  to  draw  out,  to  protract  a  war. 

Bellum  conficere,  perficere :  to  end,  to  finish  a  war. 

Bellum  deponere,  ponere,  omittere :  to  give  up,  to  discontinue 
a  war. 

Bellum  parare :  to  prepare  for  war. 

Bellum  suscipere  contra :  to  undertake,  commence  war  against. 

Bellum  gerere  cum  +  Ablative  (adversus  +  Accusative)  :  to 
wage,  to  carry  on  war  with  or  against. 

But  always :  Bellum  contra  patriam,  contra  aras — gerere. 

''With"  or  "against"  in  this  connection  may  be  expressed  by 
an  adjective. 

Ex. — Bellum  cum  lugurtha,  or  bellum  lugurthinum. 

191.  Arma  capere,  sumere  contra:  to  seize,  or  take  up,  arms 
against. 

Arma  f erre  contra :  to  bear  arms  against. 
Arma  inferre  -f-  Dative  (see  190 )  :  to  bear  arms,  to  make  war, 
against. 

Arma  ponere,  deponere :  to  lay  down,  to  lay  aside,  arms. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  109 

Ad  arma  vocare :  to  call  to  arms. 

Ad  arma  concitare,  excitare :  to  arouse  to  arms. 

Arma  tradere :  to  deliver  up  arms. 

192.  1.  Impetum  in  hostes  facere:  to  attack,  to  make  an  at- 
tack upon,  the  enemy. 

2.  Signa  in  hostes  inf erre :  to  charge,  to  make  an  assault  upon 
the  enemy. 

Signa  f  erre :  to  put  standards  in  motion,  to  break  up  camp. 

Signa  movere :  to  put  standards  in  motion,  to  break  up  camp. 

Signa  constituere :   to  halt. 

Signa  conferre  cum  aliquo:  to  engage  (in  close  fight)  with 
any  one. 

Signa  reliquere,  deserere,  or  ab  signis  discedere :  to  desert,  to 
abandon,  the  standards. 

Signa  convertere :   to  wheel. 

Signa  conversa  in  hostes  inferre :  to  wheel  and  advance  upon 
the  enemy. 

193.  (1)  Conferre  +  Dative,  or  cum  +  Ablative:   to  com- 
pare with. 

Pedem  cum  pede  conferre :  to  fight  foot  to  foot. 

Collate  pede  (Ablative  Absolute)  :  foot  to  foot,  at  close  quar- 
ters. 

Of.  comminus :   hand  to  hand. 

(2)  Manum,  or  manus  cum  hoste  conserere:  to  join  battle, 
to  engage  with  the  enemy. 

194.  Castra  ponere  (collocare,  locare)  ;  to  pitch  camp. 
Castris  locum  capere,  etc. :  to  select  a  place  for  the  camp. 
Castra  movere :   to  move,  to  break  up  camp. 

Milites  castris  (in  castris)  tenere,  continere :  to  hold,  to  keep 
soldiers  in  camp.  (See  17.) 

195.  Naves  subducere:   to  haul  up,  to  haul  ships  ashore. 
Naves  deducere :  to  launch  ships. 

Conscendere  navem,  or  in  navem :   to  go  aboard,  1 
to  embark.  I 

Egredi  navi,  or  ex  navi  (=nave)  :  to  disembark, 
to  land. 


110  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

Imponere  in  navem :  to  put  on  board,  to  embark.  ^ 
Exponere  ex  navi :   to  set  ashore,  to  land,  to  dis-  v  Trans. 

embark.  ) 

Vela  (ventis)  dare,  or  navem  solvere:   to  set  sail. 

196.  Fundere  fngareque :  to  rout  utterly. 
Fugare,  or  in  fugam  dare :  to  put  to  flight. 
Pedem  referre,  se  recipere :   to  retreat,  to  withdraw. 
In  omnes  partes  f ugerunt :  they  fled  in  all  directions. 

197.  Gratias  agere  -(-  Dative:  to  return  thanks  to,  to  thank. 
Gratiam  referre  +  Dative :  to  reconpense,  to  make  a  return  to. 
Gratiam  habere  -j-  Dative:   to  feel  (have)  gratitude  toward. 
Gratum  (neuter  adjective)  facere  -f-  Dative :   to  render  a  fa- 
vor to. 

Veniam  dare  -f-  Dative:   to  grant  pardon  to. 

198.  Latine  (Grace)  loqui:  to  speak  Latin  (Greek).    Also 
scribere,  etc. 

Latine  scire  (nescire)  :  to  understand  (not  to  understand) 
Latin. 

Latine  reddere :  to  render  or  translate  into  Latin. 

E  Graeco  in  Latinum  (e  Grasca  in  Latinam  linguam)  convert- 
ere :  to  translate  from  Greek  into  Latin. 

Graacas  (litteras)  discere:   to  learn  Greek. 

Graecis  litteris  (Dative)  studere:   to  study  Greek. 

199.  ( 1 )  In  libertatem  vindicare :   to  set  free.    Cf.liberare. 

( 2 )  In  servitutem  redigere :  to  reduce  to  slavery. 

(3)  In  potestate  (or,  potestatem)  esse,  habere:   to  be  or  have 
in  the  power  of  any  one. 

(4)  In  custodiam,  in  vincula  dare  (tradere)  :    to  commit  to 
prison,  to  chains.    So  with  ducere,  trahere,  conicere,  etc. 

(5)  Alicui  custodes  ponere:  to  place  guards  over  some  one. 

200.  In  dies,  or  in  singulos  dies :  daily,  from  day  to  day. 
Diem  noctemque,  dies  noctesque,  noctes  et  dies,  noctes  ac  dies, 

etc :   day  and  night. 

Ad  hunc  diem:   by  or  against  this  day.     (3. ) 
De  nocte:   while  it  is  yet  night. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIX  XOTES.  Ill 

Ad  (or,  in)  multam  noctem:  till  late  at  night,  far  into  the 
night. 

201.  (1)  Ita  se  res  habet:   thus  the  matter  stands;   such  is 
the  case. 

(2)  Ees  se  bene  habet,  or  bene  habet :  it  is  well. 

(3)  Quo  modo  te  habes?   how  are  you? 
Bene  me  habeo :  I  am  well  (=valeo) . 

So  also,  bene  est :  it  is  well. 

(4)  Bene  alicui  esse:  to  be  well  with  any  one. 

(5)  Bene  facis :  I  thank  you  for  doing  so;  or,  you  do  well. 
Bene  dicis :  I  thank  you  for  saying  so ;  or,  you  say  well. 

202.  1.  Quod  scribis,  rogas,  quaeris,  etc. :   as  to  your  writing, 
asking,  etc.     (Very  common  in  Cicero's  Letters.) 

2.  Quod  reliquum  est :  as  to  the  rest. 

3.  Quod  ad  earn  urbem  attinet :   in  regard  to,  as  to,  as  far  as 
concerns,  with  respect  to,  etc. — that  city. 

Quod  ad  me  attinet :  as  far  as  I  am  concerned. 
Kem.  1.  Pertinere  is  also  used  in  this  sense. 
Rem.  2.  With  quod,  etc.  (=as  to,  etc.)  compare  de  +  Ablative. 
(4)  Quod  si  (=quodsi)  :   but  if,  now  if,  and  if,  if  however. 
(Common  in  Cicero.) 

208.    (1)  Ut  ita  dicam  (ut  sic  dixerim)  :  so  to  speak. 
Ut  levissime  dicam:   to  say  the  least. 
Ut  alia  omittam :  to  pass  over  other  things. 
Vere  ut  dicam:    to  speak  truly. 
(2)   Ne  plus  dicam :  not  to  say  more. 
Ne  longum  sit,  ne  longum  f  aciam :  not  to  be  tedious. 
Xe  multis  morer :  to  be  brief,  or  not  to  detain  you  with  many 
words. 

204.    (1)  To  marry  (of  a  woman)  is  nub  ere  with  Dative. 

(2)  To  marry  (of  a  man) — luliam  in  matrimonium  ducere; 
or,  luliam  uxorem  ducere :  to  marry  Julia, 

Also,  in  matrimonium  dare,  collocare :  to  give  in  marriage ; 
in  matrimonium  petere :  to  ask  in  marriage. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 


A    CHAPTER   OF    LOOSE    NOTES,    IDIOMS,    AND    SUG- 
GESTIVE EXAMPLES. 

1.  Atque  (ac)  :    "and  more,"  "and  in  addition,"  "and  espe- 
cially." 

2.  Neque  (nee)  :  "and  not;"  sometimes  "but  not,"  "for  not." 
Do  not  use  et  non  unless  the  non  belongs  to  a  particular  word. 

3.  Neque  (nee)  enim:  "for  not."    (Non  enim  is  sometimes  em- 
ployed for  special  emphasis). 

4.  N  eg  are  (=to  say  not,  to  deny)  should  be  used  instead  of 
dicere  —  non. 

5.  Ilia  vocat  neque  quisquam  respondet  :   she  calls  and  no  one 
answers.     "And  no  one,"  "and  nothing":    neque    (nee)    quis- 
quam, quicquam  (quidquam). 

6.  Legit  neque  intellegit  :    he  reads  without  understanding. 
(Never  use  sine  +  Ablative  of  Gerund  in  such  a  sentence.) 

7.  Magistratu  (consulatu,  etc.)  abire:   to  go  out  of  office,  to 
retire  from  an  office  (the  consulship,  etc.)  . 

8.  Magistratum  inire  :  to  enter  upon  an  office. 

9.  Se  pra3tura  abdicare  :  to  resign,  to  give  up,  to  abdicate  —  the 
prsetorship,  etc.     (Cf.  magistratum  deponere.) 

10.  Ad  populum  provocare  :  to  appeal  to  the  people. 

11.  Bern  ad  senatum  referre:   to  report  the  matter  to,  to  lay 
the  matter  before,  the  senate. 

12.  Orationem  habere:   to  deliver  an  oration. 

13.  Dicto  (Dative)  audientem  esse  alicui:    to  be  obedient  to 
the  order  of  any  one.    Ex.  —  Cassari  dicto  audiens  sum:   I  obey 
Cassar. 

14.  Mihi  in  animo  est  (or,  habeo,  etc.)  scribere:   I  have  it  in 
mind,  intend  —  to  write. 

15.  Nobis  cum  aliquo  est  :  we  have  to  do  with,  or  have  dealings 
with,  some  one. 

16.  Inter  omnes  const  at  :  it  is  well  known  to  all,  or  it  is  agreed 
among  all,  all  agree. 

17.  Ad  aliquem  litteras  (epistolam)  dare  :   to  write  or  send  a 
letter  to  any  one. 

Also,  ad  aliquem  scribere,  mittere,  etc. 

18.  Facultatem,  locum,  occasionem,  potestatem  facer  e,  dare, 
offerre,  etc.  :  to  make  or  give  an  opportunity  or  occasion. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  113 

The  Genitive  of  the  Gerund,  and  ad  with  the  Accusative  of  the 
Gerund  are  used  with  these  phrases. 

19.  Procul  (longe,  multum)  inter  se  esse,  or  distare:  to  be  far 
apart. 

Also,  non  (haud)  procul,  non  multum,  non  longe,  etc. 

20.  Ab  aliqua  re  incipere,  ordiri,  oriri,  etc. :    to  begin  with 
or  from  anything. 

21.  Aliquem  ab  aliquo  defendere,  tueri,  etc. :    to  defend  or 
protect  any  one  or  anything  against  or  from  any  one  or  anything. 

22.  Deficere  aliquem:    to  fail,  to  desert  any  one. 

But,  deficere  ab  aliquo :  to  fall  away,  to  revolt  from  any  one. 

23.  Triumphare  de,  or  ex,  +  Ablative :  to  triumph  over. 
And,  victoria  +  Genitive,  or  victoria  de,  or  exf  +  Ablative : 

victory  over. 

24:.  Fidibus,  cithara,  curvo  calamo,  etc.,  canere :  to  play  on  the 
lyre,  cithern,  curved  pipe,  etc.     (17.) 

.25.  Pila   (Ablative)  ludere:    to  play  ball.     (17.) 

26.  In  eo  flumine  pons  erat :    there  was  a  bridge  over  that 
river. 

In  flumine  pontem  facere:   to  build  a  bridge  over  a  river. 

27.  Sub  monte :   at  the  foot  of  the  mountain. 

28.  Prima  luce:   at  daybreak. 

29.  lure  optimo :   with  perfect  justice. 

30.  Flumine  secundo :   down  the  river. 
Flumine  adverse :  up  the  river. 

31.  Ee  vera:   indeed,  in  fact. 

32.  Mea  sententia,  or  ex  (de)  mea  sentential1   in  my  opinion, 
according  to  my  judgment. 

33.  More,  ex  more,  lege,  ex  lege,  ex  fcedere,  ex  pacto,  etc. :   ac- 
cording to  the  custom,  law,  treaty,  agreement,  etc. 

34.  Qua  re,  qua  ex  re.    "1 

Quo,  ex  quo. 

}.  =  wherefore. 
Qua  de  causa. 

Quam  ob  rein. 

35.  De  industria :    purposely. 
De  integro :   anew,  afresh. 
De  improvise :  unexpectedly. 

36.  Quae  tua  prudentia  est.  ")  Such  is  your  prudence ; 
Qua  prudentia  es  (Disc.  Abl.).   >-      according  to  your 

Pro  tua  prudentia.  )  prudence. 


114  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

37.  "Born  of,"  "begotten  of,"  "by"  (of  man  or  woman)  with 
no  verb  or  participle  expressed,  is  rendered  by  ex  aliquo,  or  ex 
aliqua. 

38.  De  me  actum  est :  it  is  all  over  (up)  with  me. 

39.  Ex  equo  pugnare:    to  fight  on  horseback. 

40.  Summa  vi,  or  ope :  with  all  one's  might. 

41.  In  with  the  Ablative  frequently  means  "in  the  case  of." 
Ex. — In  talibus  viris :  in  the  case  of  such  men. 

42.  Principio  (in  principio),  or  initio:    in  the  beginning,  at 
first.    Ab  initio :  from  the  beginning. 

43.  Terra  marique :   on  land  and  sea. 

44.  Omnium  opinione  celerius :    more  quickly  than  any  one 
expected. 

So,  too,  spe}  exspjctatione ,  solito  (than  usual),  iusto,  aequo, 
etc.     (See  176.) 

45.  Dicer  e,  ducere,  facer  e>  and  ferre  drop  the  ending  in  second 
person  singular,  Imperative — hence,  die,  due,  fac,  and  fer. 

Also,  educ,  reduc,  refer,  confer,  perfer,  etc. 

46.  Scire,  nescire,  discere,  dediscere  -\-  Infinitive :    to  know 
how,  not  to  know  how,  to  learn  how,  to  forget  how — to  do  any- 
thing. 

Aliquid  f acere  perseverare :  to  persevere  in  doing,  to  continue 
steadily  to  do,  to  persist  in  doing — anything. 

47.  Persuadere  meaning  "to  convince"  is  followed  by  the  Ac- 
cusative +  Infinitive;   meaning  "to  persuade,"  "to  advise,"  by 
ut  or  ne  with  Subjunctive. 

48.  Faciam  ut  intellegas :  I  will  make  you  understand  (=cause 
you  to,  etc. ) . 

49.  Moleste  ferre :  to  be  annoyed,  to  be  vexed,  to  regret. 
Note  also — graviter,  segre,  vix,  aequo  animo — ferre  or  pati :   to 

endure  with  vexation  or  difficulty,  scarcely,  with  equanimity. 

Such  expressions  may  be  followed  by  the  Accusative  with  the 
Infinitive. 

50.  Valere  ad  +  Accusative  of  Gerund :   to  be  able,  or  strong 
enough,  to.     (Eegular  construction  with  this  verb.) 

51.  Consilium  capere :   to  form  or  adopt  a  plan. 

52.  Beceptui  canere:  .to  sound  (for)  a  retreat. 

53.  Eeceptui  signum  dare :  to  give  the  signal  for  retreat. 

54.  Eeceptui  cani  iussit :   he  ordered  a  retreat  to  be  sounded. 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  115 

55.  Inter  se  obsides  dare :   to  exchange  hostages. 

56.  Vim  per  angustias  facere :  to  force  a  passage  through  the 
narrows. 

57.  Vim  et  manus  inferre  +  Dative :  to  lay  violent  hands  on. 
^Estu  febrique  iactantur :  they  toss  with  feverish  heat. 

In  usu  vitaque  communi :  in  the  ordinary  practice  of  life. 
Vi  et  armis :  by  force  of  arms.     (Examples  of  Hendiadys.) 

58.  Vir  ut  inter  -ZEtolos  facundus :    an  eloquent  man  for  an 
^Etolian. 

Ut  temporibus  illis :   for,  considering  those  times. 

Ut  inter  montanos :  considering  that  it  was  among  moun- 
taineers. 

Ut  in  homine  Eomano :   as  was  natural  in  a  Eoman. 

Ut  Siculi :  as  was  to  be  expected  being  a  Sicilian ;  as  Sicilians 
are.  (See  Harper's  Lex.,  4.  a  and  b.,  under  ut.) 

59.  Potiri  rerum :  to  possess  one's  self  of  chief  power,  or  ab- 
solute control. 

60.  Opera3  pretium  est :   it  is  worth  while. 

61.  Orbis  terrarum,  orbis  terrae,  or  terrae:   the  world. 

62.  Quod  inter  colles  est  campi :  the  whole  plain  between  the 
hills  ( =what  plain  there  is,  etc. ) . 

Per  quidquid  deorum  est  (=per  omnes  deos)  :  by  all  the  gods. 
Quod  (cunque)  militum  contrahere  poteritis:    all  the  troops 
you  can  bring  together. 

63.  Ego  et  tu :  you  and  I.    Ego  et  Caesar :   Caesar  and  I. 

64.  Alter  idem :   a  second  self. 

65.  Nihil  nisi,  or  praeter :  nothing  but,  nothing  except. 
Nihil  aliud :   nothing  else. 

Nihil  aliud  nisi :  nothing  else  but,  or  than. 

66.  Optimus  quisque :   all  the  best  men.     (Earely  in  plural.) 

67.  Omnes  ad  unum  (ad  unum  omnes)  :  all  to  a  man. 

68.  Omnia :   everything.    Not  omne. 

69.  Quotusquisque  est  qui  dicat !    how  few  are  there  to  say ! 
(88.) 

70.  Kes  gestae:   achievements,  exploits. 

71.  Consul  designatus :   the  consul-elect. 

72.  Ad  unguem  factus  homo:    a  perfect  gentleman. 

73.  Res  secundse  (prosperae)  :    success,  prosperity. 
Ees  adversae :   adversity,  misfortune. 


116  HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 

74.  Sestertium:    1000  sesterces. 

75.  Biduum,  triduum,  quadriduum :  a  period  of  two,  three,  or 
four  days.    But,  quinque  dies,  etc. 

76.  In  a  series  of  words  connected  by  "and" ,  et  should  be  used 
everywhere  or  omitted  altogether. 

77.  Two  or  more  abstract  subjects  in  the  singular  generally 
take  a  singular  verb  in  Cicero. 

78.  Instead  of  in  +  the  Ablative  depending  on  a  substantive, 
the  Genitive  should  be  used  as  a  rule.    Thus,  The  towns  in  lower 
Italy :   oppida  inferioris  Italiae,  not  in  Italia. 

79.  Alii  in  aliam  partem  fugerunt :  some  ran  in  one  direction, 
some  in  another. 

80.  Urbs  Roma:   the  city  of  Rome. 

81.  Corinthi  in  prseclara  urbe :  in  the  splendid  city  of  Corinth. 
(16,  d.) 

82.  Quidam  ex  meis  amicis  (=unus  ex  meis  amicis)  :  a  friend 
of  mine. 

83.  Vos  id  moneo:    I  give  you  this  advice. 

84.  Omnes  idem  responderunt :   all  made  the  same  reply. 

85.  Quidquid  honestum  est,  idem  est  utile :   whatever  is  hon- 
orable, is  likewise  profitable. 

86.  Interrogative  "when"  is  quando.    Ex. — Quando  consul  ad- 
venit  ?  when  did  the  consul  arrive  ? 

87.  "How"  with  adjectives  and  abverbs,  and  even  alone  in  ex- 
clamations, is  quam.      Otherwise    use  quo  modo,  or  quern  ad 
modum. 

Rein. — Ut  and  qui  sometimes  have  meaning  how. 

88.  "About"  with  numerals  is  circiter  or  ad.     Ex. — Circiter 
(ad)  ducenti  equites:   about  200  horsemen. 

89.  Bene,  or  male  audire :  to  hear  one's  self  well  or  ill  spoken 
of,  to  be  in  good  or  bad  repute.    Ex. — Ab  suis  civibus  bene  audit : 
he  is  well  spoken  of  by  his  fellow  citizens,  he  is  in  good  repute 
with,  etc.    Cf.  Milton :   For  which  Britain  hears  ill  abroad. 

90.  Illud  Catonis:  that  (well-known)  saying  of  Cato's. 

91.  Cum  iam  in  eo  esset  ut  in  muros  evaderent  milites:   when 
the  soldiers  were  just  on  the  point  of  scaling  the  walls.  (141,   2.) 

92.  Hi  vos  tacite  rogant  ut  se  dignos  existimetis  quorum  sa- 
lutem  tali  viro  commendetis :  these  beg  you  silently  that  you  es- 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES.  117 

teem  them  worthy  to  entrust  their  welfare  to  such  a  man.     (See 
161  and  88,  3.)  . 

93.  Itaque  sibi  mortem  uterque  conscivit:    and  so  both  com- 
mitted suicide. 

94.  Themistocles  de  servis   suis  quern    habuit    fidelissimum 
(servum  quern  habuit  fidelissimum)   ad  regem  misit:    Themis- 
tocles sent  to  the  king  the  most  faithful  slave  he  had. 

95.  Quae  non  semper  facultas  datur:   a  privilege  which  is  not 
always  given. 

Amanus,  qui  mons  erat  hostium  plenus :   Amanus,  a  mountain 
which  was  full  of  enemies. 

96.  Hostis :    a  public  enemy. 
Inimicus :   a  personal  enemy. 

97.  Longe  lateque  (or,  simply  late)  :   far  and  wide. 

98.  Acriter  pugnatum  est :   a  desperate  fight  took  place,  there 
was  fierce  fighting. 

In  Troianos  saevitum  est :   fury  was  vented  (cruelty  was  prac- 
ticed) upon  the  Trojans.     (See  158.) 

99.  Mirabile  dictu :   wonderful  to  tell. 
Miserabile  visu :   pitiable  to  behold. 

Optimum  factu:  the  best  thing  to  be  done.     (72.) 

100.  Videre  est  credere:    seeing  (to  see)  is  believing  (to  be- 
lieve).   (72.) 

101.  Sed  haec  hactenus :   but  so  much  for  this. 


INDEX. 


£iT  Heavy  numbers  refer  to  sections.     Numbers  marked  *  refer  to  odd  notes 
and  examples  at  the  end. 

ACCUSATIVE — 
Arma,  etc:,  191 

Asseverations,    oaths  —  Subjunctive 
in,  98 

Attack,  etc.,  192 


ABLATIVE — 15  to  39,  inclusive. 

Ablative  of  Place  Where,  15 

Locative,  16 

Place  Where  in  light  of  cause,  etc., 
17 

Place  Whence,  18 

Domo,  etc.,  19 

Place  of  Kesidence,  Birth,  etc.,  20 

Movere,  etc.,  21 

Local  designations,  22 

Cause,  Means  and  Instrument,  23 

Respect,  24 

Agent,  25 

Manner,  26 

Descriptive  Ablative,  27 

Ab.  ex,—  Point  of  View,  28 

Prae  with  Ablative,  29 

Verbs  of  Removing,  etc.,  30 

Verbs  of  Differing,  etc. ,  3 1 

Verbs  of  Filling,  etc. ,  32 

Niti  and  Stare,  33 

Opus  and  Usus,  34 

Adjectives  with  Ablative,  35 

Excess  or  Difference,  36 

Ablative  of  Price  or  Value,  37 

Ablative  of  Material,  38 

Ablative  with  Afflcere,  39 

Ablative  Absolute,  136 
ACCUSATIVE,  1  to  14 

Terminus,  1 

Local  Designations,  2 

"By,"  "against,"  3 

Ad  and  in  Final,  4  and  10 

Adverbial  Accusative,  5 

Greek  Accusative,  6 

Accusative  of  Extent,  7 

Measure  of  Distance,  8 

Comparative  expressions,  9 

Time  to  come,  10 

Length,  breadth,  etc  ,  11 

"  Country  of,"  12 

Apud,  13  and  187 

"At"  "near,"  14  and  187 

Accusative  with  Infinitive,  76 

Adjectives  like  adverbs,  etc.,  173 

Agmen  and  acies,  188 

Antequam  and  priusquam,  151 


Bellum,  etc.,  190 
"Borrow,"  "lend,"  182 


Calendar,  133  and  foil. 
Castra,  etc.,  194 
Cause,  means,  etc.,  23  and  17 
Causal  Particles,  146 
Comparative,  Kule  for,  176,  *44 
CONDITIONAL  SENTENCES,  112-132 
Protasis  represented,  115 
Omission  of  Protasis  and  Apodosis, 

116 

Logical  Condition,  118 
Logical  Condition  in  0.  O.,   118. 

Rems.  1  and  2 
Ideal  Condition,  119 
Ideal    Condition   in   O.    O.,     119. 

Rems.  1  and  2 
Indicative  in  Ideal  Condition.  121, 

122 

Unreal  Condition,  123  and  foil. 
Indicative  in  Unreal  Condition,  124, 

126, 127 
Same  in  O.  O.,  124,  C.  Note;  126, 

Note;  127 
Periphrastic  Active  in  Unreal  Past 

Condition,  125 

Pure  Unreal  Condition  in  O.  0.,  128 
Subjunctive      Dependency,      129, 

130,  131 

Conditional  Sentences  of  Compari- 
son, 132 

Concessive  Subjunctive,  99 
Conditional  Wish,  98 
Consecutive  Subjunctive,  86,  88 
CUM,  102 

D 
DATIVE,  40-49 

Dative  with  Intransitive  Verbs,  4O 
Dative    with  verbs  of   giving  and 

putting,  41 


120 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 


DATIVE — 

Dative  with  verbs  of  taking  away 

42 

Dative  with  esse  (to  have),  43 
Dative  of  the  name,  44 
Dative  with  licet,  45 
Double  Dative,  46 
Dative  with  nouns,  47 
Dative  with  adjectives,  48 
Dative  with  obvius  and  obviam,  49 
Debeo,  possum,  oportet,  etc.,  154 
Debt,  181 
Dum  with  Present  Tense,  150 


Facere  non  possum.  93 

Fieri  non  potest,  93 

Fearing,  verbs  of,  84 

Fides,  etc  ,  184 

Fight,  etc.,  189 

Future  Perf.  Tense  in  Letters,  155 


GENITIVE,  50-64 

Subjective  and  Objective  Genitive, 

50 

Possessive  Genitive.  51 
Partitive  Genitive,  52,  53 
Characteristic  Genitive.  54 
Genitive  with  esse  and  fieri,  55 
Genitive  with  verbs  of  Reminding, 

etc.,  56 

Genitive  with  verbs  of  Remember- 
ing, etc.,  57 
In  mentem  venire,  58 
Certiorem  facere,  58 
Genitive  with  Judicial  Verbs,  59 
Genitive  with  Verbs  of  Emotion,  62 
Genitive  with  Intereat  and  Refert, 

63 

Genitive  with  Adjectives,  64 
Gerund,  72,  73 


Hendiadys,  examples  of,  *57. 
HINDERING,   PREVENTING,  DOUBTING, 

ETC  ,  Verbs  of,  89-95 
Historical  Present,  148 
Historical  Infinitive,  149 


Jam,    iam    diu,    iam   pridem,    with 
Present  and  Imperfect  Tenses,  153 

IMPERATIVE,  103-107,  111 

INFINITIVE,  72-78 
Gerund,  72,  73 
Infinitive  Tenses,  Active,  74 
Infinitive  Tenses,  Passive,  75 
Accusative  with  Infinitive,  76 
Nominative  with  Infinitive,  77 
Complementary  Infinitive,  78 


INFINITIVE — 

Historical  Infinitive,  149 
Intransitive  Verbs  in  Passive,  158 
and  *98. 

r,  159 
ative  Action,  144 


Latine,  etc.,  198 
Lex,  etc,  185 

M 

Marry,  204 

Miscellaneous,     186      196,     199, 
200,  201,  202,  203 

Mille  and  milia,  169 
Modus,  179 
Multus,  172,  200 


Navis,  195 

Nedum,  85 

Nemo  and  nihil,  166 

Non  guia,  quod,  etc.,  143 


Oportet  and  necesse  est,  156 
Order  of  certain  words,  175 
Oratio  Recta  and    Oratio   Obliqua, 

108-111 
Partial  O.  0.,  or  O.  O.  Reference, 

110 
Imperative  in  O.  O.,  Ill 


Participles,  137-141 
Per  aliquem  stare,  94 
Postquam,  ubi,  ut,  etc.,  145 
Purpose  or  Design,  82 
Purpose  constructions,  83 
Punish,  183 

a 

Quando,  *86 
QUESTIONS.  65-71 
Simple  questions,  65 
Compound  questions,  66 
"Whether— or  not,"  68 
An -"or  then,"  67 
Mood  of  Indirect  questions,  69 
Haud  scio,  nescio,  an,  70 
Rhetorical  questions,  71,  101 
Quin,  89-95 
Quis  (aliquis),  164 
Quisque,  167,  175 


Reflexive,  160 
RELATIVE,  161-163,  83,  88 

Reliquum,  174 
Restrictive  Clauses,  157 
RESULT,  TENDENCY,  etc.,  86,  88 


HAND-BOOK  OF  LATIN  NOTES. 


121 


s 

Sequence  (Past)  after  Present  or 
Future,  147 

Sequence  after  Perfect,  152 

"So-called,"  163 
SUBJUNCTIVE  (Tenses),  79-81 

Optative  Subjunctive  (Wishes),  96 

Asseverations,  97 

Conditional  Wish,  98 

Concessive  Subjunctive,  99 

Purpose,  82  ;  With  Verbs  of  Fear- 
ing, 84 ;  Imperative  Subjunctive, 
103-107 

Potential  Subjunctive,  100-101 

Sundry  expressions  of  Time,  180 

Supine,  72,  83,  *99 


Tantum  abent,  etc. ,  95 

"  Thank,"  197 

"  The-the,"  177 

"  The  same  as,"  171 

"  This  of,"  "that  of,"  etc.,  165 

TJ 

Units,  Uttus,  etc.,  170 
Ut  with  Indicative   87,  145 
Uterque,  etc.,  167,  168 
Utor,  fruor,  etc.,  178 

W 

"  Without,"  142 


FOURTEEN  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 


This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 

on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 


3Jan'56fiEO 

nrn  7       iqcic;  / 

UC.U  i      lanTi  tn 

h<    ).•""> 

| 

21'«*<ij  OTUU 

REC'D  LD 

JUN-16'64-8AM 

.r.  1  Q  'V 

SSL 

^\)G13  ' 

?J2£ 

SH5.CIR.W     ?78 

T  r>  01    inn™  o  '55                                      General  Library 
(§18»5a)Kl'  5'                                Uohr-^JMMlfaHrf. 

51728 


